Hewlett-Packard 2622A, 2623A Terminal User Manual

WA FAcxano
VE
jeuuda y SOIydeuo =
Vecsc
сена Лек)
222A
223A
Display Terminals
KW} Sackano
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
The Federal Communications Commission (in 47 CFR 15.818) has specified that the following
notice be brought to the attention of the users of this product.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions manual, may cause interference to radio commu-
nications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device
pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at
his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference.
NOTICE
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
HEWLETT-PACKARD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATER-
IAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors
contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, perfor-
mance or use of this material.
Hewlett-Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is
not furnished by Hewlett-Packard.
This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved.
No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another program language
without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Copyright © 1982 by HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY
HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY
974 EAST ARQUES AVENUE
SUNNYVALE, CALIFORNIA, 94086 Printed in U.S.A. 7/82
Preface
The HP 2622A Display Terminal is a versatile character, line, or block mode CRT terminal. The HP 2623A
Graphics Terminal has the same alphanumeric capabilities as the HP 2622A.
This reference manual contains detailed information for configuring, testing, and using the terminal.
For ease of use, the manual is divided into ten sections and three appendices, as follows:
Section I
Section II
Section III
Section IV
Section V
Section VI
Section VII
Section VIII
Section IX
Section X
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
General Information
Configuring the Terminal
Keyboard Control
Display Control
Printer Control
Data Communications
Status
Error Messages and Self-Test
Terminal Maintenance Procedures
Graphics Control Functions
Escape Codes
Keyboards and Character Sets
Programming Examples
Table of Contents
Section I Page
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Introduction ...........eeeeoececorerrecosereremI... 1-1
Keyboard...........0000000 00e ass ae eee ana ane 6 1-3
Function Keys .........2000000 00 sea sea ea sa ane ae ae 1-5
Configuring the Terminal .......................... 1-5
Integral Printer ................................... 1-8
External Printer Port (HP 2623A only). ............. 1-7
Data Communications ..........e-eeec.eorocoenvere. 1-7
Self-Test..........._c_ecrewresccreroorecoreroncere en. 1-7
Section II Page
CONFIGURING THE TERMINAL
Introduction .........00200000 00 eee eee es ae aa aa aa see 2-1
Configuration Function Keys ...................... 2-1
Terminal Configuration Menu ..................... 2-1
Lock/Unlock Configuration Menus ............... 2-9
Setting Configuration Parameters with
Escape Codes .............eeeeeneececcecíreceee.. 2-9
Section III Page
KEYBOARD CONTROL
Introduction ............_eeeeeoeorrrerocarererere. 3-1
Selecting Modes ..............—r—cerdcsrecrrereearen. 3-1
Remote/Local Modes ..............eeeeeeecosaco. 3-1
Character/Block Modes ............. cco... 3-1
Format Mode ...........e._eeeovocroracacarere, 3-2
Line Modify Mode ...........e.e_._eeceesseroacaro. 3-2
Modify All Mode ............e_m_eeeereosccervecoe. 3-2
AutoLineFeed Mode ................... LL. 3-3
Memory Lock Mode ............. cian... 3-3
Overflow Protect ............ coins. 3-3
Display Lock ............. iit, 3-3
Display Functions Mode ........................ 3-4
Caps Mode ...........00000000 0e ee sa ae aa anna eee 3-4
Caps Lock Mode .............000000000 ec anna cu nes 3-4
Graphics/Numeric Keypad on the HP 2623A......... 3-5
User-Definable Keys .......... cc. iii. 3-5
Defining Keys Locally .......................... 3-5
Defining Keys Programmatically ................ 3-6
Controlling the User Keys Menu
Programmatically ..................... о 3-7
Controlling the Function Key Labels
Programmatically ........................... 3-7
[ENTER] Key... ee ea eee sa aa en ae 3-7
Send Display (Ed) .......022200 00e a aa ea 3-10
Enable/Disable Keyboard ..........eee.rrr.2.00í..:9-11
Soft Reset ............eeos-..eneococorerannaceroeee. 3-11
Hard Reset .........._eeocecoccorevorraaoaanonao.. 3-11
Break ............eccxecrrocarercecrererieco near. 3-12
Bell .......... ..rcciorereararorereraanerecroorer 3-12
Wait oo. к вне нана е ное 3-12
Modem Disconnect ........... iii. 3-12
Section IV Page
DISPLAY CONTROL
Introduction .................. i... 4-1
Cursor Control ............e.eeeceeeocerocorecacec. 4-1
Home Up ................e.00c0ero0cocorcccacevo 4-1
Home Down .............. ci... 4-2
Move Cursor Up... ...... i. 4-2
Move Cursor Down ............................. 4-2
Move Cursor Right ............................. 4-2
Move Cursor Left ............................... 4-2
Roll Text Up .............e.ee0cccorercorocrecne. 4-2
Roll Text Down ...........eeeeereeoccocorerorere. 4-3
Next Page/Previous Page ....................... 4-3
Memory Addressing Scheme ............ Cea 4-4
Row Addressing ............eec_eeesererecorererco 4-4
Column Addressing ................... cia... 4-4
Cursor Sensing ...........eo_eereocoroncoracereo. 4-4
Cursor Positioning ............................. 4-4
Screen Relative Addressing ...................... 4-5
Absolute Addressing ............... iii... 4-5
Cursor Relative Addressing ..................... 4-6
Combining Absolute and Relative Addressing ..... 4-6
Edit Operations ............. ccna. 4-6
Insert Line ............... iii... 4-6
Delete Line ........... iii. 4-7
Insert Character ............................... 4-7
Delete Character ................ ccna. 4-8
Clear Display ..............eeeeererecrocorevao. 4-8
Clear Line ............eeeeecrecocceosoenecconoao, 4-9
Setting and Clearing Margins ...................... 4-9
Setting and ClearingTabs ......................... 4-9
Tab eee 4-10
Back Tab ..........e.e.eeenococorerarerceceorenro.. 4-10
Display Enhancements ........................... 4-10
Screen Blanking ................... ii... 4-10
Designing and Using Forms ...................... 4-12
Drawing Forms ............. co iii... 4-12
Forms Mode (Format Mode) ....................... 4-15
Protected Fields ............................... 4-15
Unprotected Fields ............................ 4-15
Section V Page
PRINTER CONTROL
Introduction ................ iL 5-1
Selecting Printer Modes ............. cco... 5-1
Record Mode .................. ia... 5-1
_ Expanded Characters ............eeessorecacenas UD
Compressed Characters ............eeee_cerecoo. 5-2
Report Format ................................. 5-3
MetricFormat ................................. 5-3
Data Logging ......... iin 5-4
Top Logging ....... RG 5-4
Bottom Logging ............... iLL. 5-4
111
Section V (Continued) Page
Display to Printer Alphanumeric Data Transfers. .... 5-4
Copy Line........... iii iii. 5-5
Copy Page ..........oeeeerececerearoearerarero. 5-5
Copy AIT .....2200202 04e eee ea ea ea aa aa ea en aa ane 5-5
Copy All of Display Memory ..................... 5-5
Copy Menu ...........eeerecororacore rea eecíana 5-5
Skip Line ..........eeceoeeearorororeoeoorarere, 5-5
Skip Page ..........._e_e-eececscccorarecereenere, 5-6
Device Control Completion Codes ............... . 5-6
Graphics Memory to Printer Data Transfer
(HP 2623A) 2012002 LL a ea a aa aa a aa ana ana anne 5-6
Computer to Terminal Data Transfers ............... 5-7
Integral Printer Self-Test .......................... 5-8
Configuring the External Printer .................. 5-8
Cabling ............. 2.2... e. .000racecioo.. 5-8
Filling the Configuration Menu ................. 5-8
Section VI Page
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
Introduction ................ i... 6-1
Hardwired Connections . ........................... 6-1
Modem Connections ............r_ee_eecererevocoreroo 6-1
Modem Configurations ...................... co... 6-2
Installing a Point-to-Point Configuration ........... 6-2
Cabling 000200000000 e ea aa ee ea aa ea aa aa ea 6-3
Configuring the Terminal .......................... 6-3
Point-to-Point Programming Information ........... 6-6
Start and Stop Bits ................ LL. 6-7
Parity Checking .......... [нажановооннооннонннное 6-7
Receive Buffer ................................. 6-7
Receive Errors ................................. 6-7
Local/Remote Modes ............................ 6-7
Full-Duplex Operation .......................... 6-8
Pacing Mechanism ............................. 6-8
Section VII Page
STATUS
Introduction ................ i... 7-1
Interpreting Status ............................... 7-1
Terminal ID Status ............................. 7-1
Terminal Status ................................ 7-2
Primary Terminal Status ..................... 7-2
Secondary Terminal Status ................... 7-2
Primary Status Bytes ........................ 7-3
Secondary Status Bytes ...................... 7-5
DeviceStatus ...................... cc... 7-6
HP 2623A Graphics Status ...................... 7-7
Read Device I.D. (Parameter =1) ............. 7-8
iv
Read Current Pen Position (Parameter = 2) .... 7-8
Read Graphics Cursor Position (Parameter = 3) 7-8
Read Cursor Position with Wait (Parameter = 4) 7-8
Read Display Size (Parameter =5) ............ 7-9
Read Device Capabilities (Parameter = 6) ..... 7-9
Read Graphics Text Status (Parameter = 7) .... 7-9
Read Zoom Status (Parameter =8) ........... 7-10
Read Relocatable Origin (Parameter = 9) ..... 7-10
Read Reset Status (Parameter = 10) ......... 7-10
Read Area Shading Capability
(Parameter = 11) ........................ 7-10
SECTION VII (Continued)
Read Graphic Modification Capabilities
(Parameter = 12) ........................ 7-10
Any Other Parameter ....................... 7-10
Section VIII Page
ERROR MESSAGES AND SELF-TESTS
Introduction ................. FA 8-1
Error Messages .........o__eeecreaesccocorernorerer. 8-1
Terminal Self-Tests ..............eeeeerreerosccoceroo 8-1
Power-OnTest ............... cia... 8-1
Terminal Test ............e—ceecresecocorererecare, 8-2
Identify ROMS ...............e_eecescacararorea. 8-3
Datacomm Test .........ecereorererecorecorerere, 8-3
Printer Test ..........o_.eoewcresescrrverecocerare, 8-3
Section IX Page
TERMINAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Introduction ......................... PP RR 9-1
Cleaning the Screen and Keyboard ................. 9-1
Battery Maintenance .................... oon... 9-1
Thermal Printer Paper ............................ 9-2
Paper Loading ............... ccc. iii... 9-3
Section X Page
GRAPHICS CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Introduction .................. i... 10-1
Graphics Display ................. ccc ii... 10-1
Keyboard Graphics Functions ..................... 10-1
Programmable Graphics Functions ................ 10-2
Control Codes ....................... uuu... 10-2
Commands................c iii... 10-2
Parameters ...............ccovviiiinnnni... 10-3
Graphics Display Control ......................... 10-3
Graphics Cursor Control ....................... 10-3
Graphics Cursor On/Off ..................... 10-3
Graphics Cursor Positioning ................. 10-3
Graphics Memory Control ...................... 10-4
Graphics Display On/Off .................... 10-4
Graphics Display Set/Clear .................. 10-4
Graphics Drawing Mode Parameters .............. 10-4
Drawing Modes .............. e... ..r0v00000reo 10-4
Clear Mode ..................00000 10-6
Set Mode ..................2 000000000000. 10-6
Complement Mode ..................—.2000.. 10-6
Jam Mode .................... ccoo. 10-6
Selective Erase ............................. 10-6
Drawing Patterns ............................. 10-6
Line Type .................000000r00000 ee 10-6
Define Line Pattern ........... ea 10-7
Define Area Pattern ........................ 10-8
Area Fill ........ a aa a ea a aa aa aa 10-10
Area Fill, Absolute ......................... 10-10
Area Fill, Relocatable ......................10-10
Relocatable Origin ........................... 10-11
Set Relocatable Origin, Absolute ............ 10-11
Set Relocatable Origin to Current
Pen Position ............................ 10-12
Set Relocatable Origin to Graphics
Cursor Position ......................... 10-12
Section X (Continued)
Selecting the Graphics Default Parameters... ..
Plotting Sequences. .....
Pen Control ..........
Vectors ..............
ASCII Formats .......
ASCIT Absolute Format see 1
+ a a 5 "OW = + + + ® 8 #6 % ява авео же
a «+ ® 4 à 6 » + v 5 + 4 4 ® = = * v à $& 5 50%
в с твое 8 =: + 4 & + à = = 8&8 ° & & … я #
+ + а вон ан ен кв ев звене че кв ва
ASCII Incremental Format .................
ASCII Relocatable Format. .................
Binary Format .......
a . 8 4 ® =: ® 4 & % + vu = 8 #6 » % % 8 8 °F
Binary Absolute Format ....................
Binary Short Incremental ..................
Binary Incremental Format ................
Binary Relocatable Format .................
Graphics Functions in Display Functions Mode ....
Graphics Hardcopy Operations ...................
Initiating a Transfer from the Keyboard ........
Using the & р Escape Sequences .............
Graphics Text ..........
т о e #4 + 3 + BF ее ча чаев та вв чае
Keyboard Control of Graphics Text ............
Program Control of Graphics Text .............
Size ..............
Text Direction .....
Slant .............
Justification/Origin
a BB a se a ex * 6 8 .........
* 8 BB 4% 8 + + % +» + 8 BoB SB 8 2 5 Ea 5% ве
a #4 : + =: * 3 3 & 8 » 3 # 8 » » + + % K 2 = = =
Section X (Continued)
Turning Graphics Text On and Off...........
Graphics Text Status ...........e_e-e.eeeee—..
Label ........... em eerrevecconrrerrer e
Compatability Mode .................—Ñ—rreeeve...
Compatibility Mode Configuration ............
Graphics Input Terminator .................
Page Full Busy ............eeeereeoeeaecee.
Page Full Break ...........................
GraphicData ............. cocina.
Graphics Data Format ........................
iS a a see a aa a 1000 0
Scaled Mode Graphics Text .................
Unscaled Mode Graphics Text ...............
Appendix A
ESCAPE CODES
Appendix B
KEYBOARDS AND CHARACTER SETS
Appendix C
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES
Appendix D
DATACOMM CONNECTOR PINS
lllustrations
Title Page
HP 2622A Display Terminal ....................... 1-1
HP 2623A Graphics Terminal ...................... 1-1
HP 2622A Keyboard .............................. 1-3
HP 2623A Keyboard ............................. 1-3A
Function Keys and Screen Labels .................. 1-4
Mode Selection Key Labels ........................ 1-4
HP 2622A and HP 2623 A Function Key
Hierarchy .......... ci... 1-4
User Keys Definition Menu ........................ 1-5
Default User Key Labels ........................... 1-5
Sample User-Supplied User Key Labels ............. 1-5
HP 2622A Terminal Configuration Menu............ 2-1
HP 2623A Terminal Configuration Menu .......... 2-1A
Screen-Labeled Function Keys ..................... 3-1
User Keys Definition Menu and
Default User Key Labels ........................ 3-5
The “Roll” Data Functions ......................... 4-1
Previous Page and Next Page Concepts ............. 4-3
Row Addressing... dav 4-4
Column Addressing ............................... 4-5
Character Insert with Margins ..................... 4-7
Character Delete with Margins .................... 4-8
Menu After Entering Four Enhancement Escape
Sequences ............eeecevcdrearererece ren. 4-11
Line Drawing Set Elements ....................... 4-12
Sample Data Entry Form ......................... 4-12
Completed Data Entry Form ...................... 4-13
Base Set Equivalents for Data Entry Form
Illustrated in Figure 4-9 ....................... 4-13
Use of Shift-In and Shift-Out Codes ............... 4-14
Character Sizes and Enhancements as
Printed on the Integral Printer .................. 5-2
Report and Metric Formats ........................ 5-3
Integral Printer Self-Test Output ................... 5-9
HP 2623A Graphics Terminal, Rear View .......... 5-11
External Peripheral Port Cabling
(HP 13242 Cables) ..................... ...... 5-11
External Device Configuration Menu .............. 5-12
HP 2622A Display Terminal, Rear View ............. 6-3
Terminal Cabling (HP 13222 Cables) ............... 6-4
Terminal Cabling (HP 13265A Modem or
HP 13266A Current Loop Converter) ............. 6-4
vi
Title Page
Datacomm Configuration Menu .................... 6-5
Primary Terminal Status Example ................. 7-2
Secondary Terminal Status Example ............... 7-4
Device Status Bytes ............................... 7-6
Device Status Example ............................ 7-6
Screen Test Pattern, Standard Terminal ............. 8-2
Screen Test Pattern, Option 202
(Line Drawing Character Set) ................... 8-2
ROM Identification Listing ........................ 8-3
Integral Printer Self-Test Output ................... 8-4
Battery Location, Rear Panel ...................... 9-1
Removing the Battery ............................. 9-2
Printer Mechanism ............................... 9-3
Location of Graphics Keys ........................ 10-1
Examples of Drawing Modes ...................... 10-5
Predefined Line Type Patterns .................... 10-6
Using Area Patterns as Line Types ................ 10-7
Examples of User-Defined Line Patterns ........... 10-8
Area Pattern Examples ........................... 10-9
Relocatable Design ............................. 10-11
Current Pen Position and New End Point ......... 10-12
Displaying Graphic Sequences ................... 10-17
Graphics Text Characters... ...................... 10-18
Graphics Text Sizes ............................. 10-19
Graphics Text Direction ......................... 10-19
Graphics Text Justification ...................... 10-21
Turning On Compatibility Mode .................. 10-24
Comparison of a Terminal with 1024 x 780 Display
andthe HP 2623A ............................ 10-24
Scaled Data ................. 0.0 iii. 10-25
UnscaledData.................................. 10-25
Swedish/Finnish Keyboard (Option 001) ............ B-2
Danish/Norwegian Keyboard (Option 002) .......... B-2
French Keyboard (Option 003), AZERTY Layout ....B-2
French Keyboard (Option 003), QWERTY Layout ...B-3
German Keyboard (Option 004) .................... B-3
United Kingdom Keyboard (Option 005) ............ B-3
Spanish Keyboard (Option 006 ..................... B-4
Line Drawing Set Elements ....................... B-6
Sample Data Entry Form ......................... B-6
FORMIOI Source Listing ......................... C-1
LRGLINE Source Listing .......................0... C-2
Tables
Title Page
Specifications ............. ci iii e ee 1-1
Terminal Configuration Menu Fields ............... 2-2
Configuration Function Keys [f4], [f7], and [f8] ...... 2-6
[ENTER] Key Operation ...............eoerececacos 3-7
External Peripheral Port Data
Communication Cables ........................ 5-11
External Device Configuration Menu Fields ....... 5-12
Data Communications Cables and
Text Connectors ...........eeeervrorecocoorecm.. 6-2
Modems ...........eeeeeovecorerracorororererere 6-2
Datacomm Configuration Menu Fields .............. 6-5
ASCII Status Characters ............eerreeorecenoe. 7-1
HP 2623A Graphics Status Requests ................ 7-7
Graphics Control Keys ........................... 10-2
Summary of Graphics Sequence Types ............. 10-2
Graphics Display Control Functions ............... 10-3
Graphics Mode Commands ........................ 10-4
Title Page
Graphics Parameter Default Values .............. 10-12
Graphics Plotting Control Functions ............. 10-12
Characters Used in Packed Data Formats ......... 10-15
Absolute Format Addressing Bytes ............... 10-16
Incremental (Short) Vector Bytes ................. 10-16
Graphics Control Sequences Used in
Record Operations. ........................... 10-17
Graphics Text Functions ......................... 10-18
Compatibility Mode Control Sequences ........... 10-22
Commands for Selecting Compatibility Mode. ..... 10-23
Coding of Compatibility Mode Graphics Data ..... 10-27
Escape Codes... ian. A-1
Standard ISO/ASCII Character Codes .............. B-5
Extended Roman Character Codes ................. B-5
ASCII Character Set ...................... ........ B-7
ASCII (7-bit) Character Codes ..................... B-8
EBCDIC Character Codes ......................... B-9
vil
General Description
SECTION
INTRODUCTION
The HP 2622A Display Terminal and HP 2623A Graphics
Terminal (figures 1-1 and 1-2) are versatile general pur-
pose CRT terminals that offer the following features:
e CRT screen size of 150 mm (6 inches) by 215 mm (8.5
inches).
e Screen capacity of 24 lines of up to 80 characters each
(1920 characters total). Two additional lines for system
soft key labels.
e Display enhancements (inverse video, blinking, under-
lining, and half-bright).
e Character, line, or block mode operation.
® Eight user-definable function keys ( MEN through )
are provided. The function of these keys is displayed in
tworows of labels across the bottom of the display screen.
The labels are definable (up to 16 characters each). The
character strings returned when the keys are pressed
can be defined with up to 80-character strings.
e All terminal configuration operations are performed
through keyboard entries into formatted menus dis-
played on the screen, there are no physical straps.
(Configuration data is maintained in non-volatile
memory.)
e Two-character user-definable (23) key.
e Optional line drawing character set.
e Screen labeled system function keys (for selecting oper-
ating modes and performing other terminal control
functions).
e Extended Character Set (supports all national keyboard
layouts).
o Full editing capabilities (insert/delete/clear line and
insert/delete character).
* Adjustable margins and tab stops.
* Programmatic cursor sensing and addressing.
e Easy-to-use keyboard with separate numeric key pad. -
¢ Extensive self-test capability.
Optional built-in printer—provides either normal, ex-
panded, or compressed character output of alphanumeric
data from either the display or datacomm.
Figure 1-1. HP 2622A Display Terminal
In addition to the HP 2622A features, the HP 2623A
Graphics Terminal has the following graphics features:
e Independent graphics and alphanumeric display
memories. The graphics memory has 512 by 390 display-
able points and selective erase.
e Fast vector generation up to 9600 baud with 11 definable
line types.
Figure 1-2. HP 2623A Graphics Terminal
1-1
General Description
Rectangular area shading with either predefined line
types or user-defined pattern.
Graphics Text Composition—variable character orien-
tation and size; block or slanted; international
characters.
RS232 External Peripheral Port.
Optional built-in thermal printer—graphics memory
hardcopy, 14.5 x 11 cm (5.75 x 4.25 in.) image centered
Software support of HP 3000/DSG and HP Graphics
1000/11.
Compatibility Mode accepts data that has been format-
ted for Tektronix 4010 and 4012 terminals. Unscaled
Compatibility Mode displays a 512 by 390 subset of the
1024 by 780 addressable points used in the Tektronix
terminals. Scaled Compatibility Mode displays a scaled
down (512 x 390) version of the 1024 by 780 addressable
points.
on 8% inch wide thermal paper, in 60 seconds. Also pro-
vides alphanumeric output described for HP 2622A.
HP 2623A.
Table 1-1. Specifications
GENERAL
Screen Size:
Screen Capacity:
Character Generation:
Character Size:
Character Set:
Cursor:
Display Enhancements:
Display Modes:
Refresh Rate:
Memory:
Keyboard:
Operating Modes:
Transmission Modes:
Electrical Interface:
Data Rates:
Parity:
164 mm (6.5 inches) by 215 mm (8.5 inches)
24 lines of 80 columns (1920 characters).
Two additional lines for system soft key labels.
7 by 11 character in 9 by 15 dot cell
2.4 mm (0.094 inch) by 4.24 mm (0.167 inch)
128 ASCII character set and extended Roman set standard
Blinking-underline
Inverse, underline, blinking, half-bright
White on black
60 Hz (50 Hz optional)
20 K-byte ROM;
3840 bytes (2 pages display memory;
256 bytes of RAM for data communication buffer;
128 bytes of non-volatile RAM (battery backup provided)
512 dots by 390 rows of displayable points (HP 2623A only)
Detached, with 1.2 m (4 feet) cable.
Full ASCII keyboard;
8 screen labeled keys;
auto-repeat;
N-key rollover.
Numeric keyboard and independent user and cursor keys.
Combination Numeric Pad and Graphics Control Pad (HP 2623A only).
Remote;
Local;
Character, Line, Block;
Forms, Non-Forms.
Full duplex, asynchronous point-to-point.
Optional external data communications via modems such as the HP 13265A.
Electrical Industry Association (EIA) Standard RS-232-C
110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600 baud.
Integral printer—120 cps maximum.
Selectable: Even, odd, zero, one, none
1-2
Table 1-1 lists the specifications for the HP 2622A and the
General Description
Table 1-1. Specifications (Continued)
Keyboard:
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Input Voltage:
Power Consumption: 75 watts (standard)
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Weight Display Monitor:
16.8 kg (37 pounds) standard
19.0 kg (42 pounds) with integral printer
Keyboard:
2.0 kg (4.4 pounds)
Dimensions: Display Monitor:
380 mm wide by 475 mm deep by 440 mm high (15.0 inches by 18.7 inches by 17.3 inches)
430 mm wide by 190 mm deep by 75 mm high (17.0 inches by 7.5 inches by 3.0 inches)
115V (+10%, —25%) at 50/60 Hz (+5%)
230 V (+10%, — 15%) at 50 Hz (=5%)
130 watts (with integral printer)
OPTIONS
-001 Swedish/Finnish Keyboard
-002 Danish/Norwegian Keyboard
-003 French Keyboard
-004 German Keyboard
-005 United Kingdom Keyboard
-006 Spanish Keyboard
-013 50 Hz, 240 V Power
-014 60 Hz, 100 V Power
-015 50 Hz, 230 V
-016 50 Hz, 115V
-050 Integral Printer
-201 Line Drawing Character Set
KEYBOARD Graphics Control/Numeric Pad Group (HP 2623A)—
The terminal keyboards (see figures 1-3 and 1-4) are
divided into five major groups of keys.
Alphanumeric Group—This group of keys is similar to a
standard typewriter keyboard and consists of the alpha-
betic, numeric, and symbol keys. Included are lower and
upper case alphabetic characters, ASCII control codes,
punctuation characters; and some commercial symbols.
Numeric Pad Group (HP 2622A)—The numeric group of
keys is located to the right of the alphanumeric keys. The
layout of the numeric key pad is similar to that of a stan-
dard office calculator. These keys may be used for high-
speed entry of large quantities of numeric data.
In addition to the numeric pad function, these keys control
the graphics display, graphics cursor, and graphics copy to
the optional built-in printer or external peripheral.
(7) toggles the numeric and graphics functions. After a
hard reset, £3, or at power-on, the graphics
functions are in effect; the numeric functions are off.
Cursor Control Group—This group of keys is used for
moving the cursor around on the screen (up, down, left, or
right) and for controlling what portion of the display ap-
pears on the screen (home up, home down, roll up, roll
down, next page, and previous page).
Edit Control Group—These keys are used for inserting
and deleting characters and lines in relation to the current
cursor position.
1-3
General Description
Figure 1-3. HP 2622A Keyboard
Function Group—This group of keys (MEME through — Swedish/Finnish (Option 001)
HN ) perform different functions depending upon which Danish/Norwegian (Option 002)
keystrokes have been performed. At any given time the French (Option 003)
applicable labels for these keys appear across the bottom of German (Option 004)
the display screen. United Kingdom (Option 005)
Spanish (Option 006)
The United States (USASCII) keyboard is the standard
keyboard. As an option you can order any of the following If you order any of the above keyboards then your terminal
internationsl keyboards instead: automatically includes the optional extended character set
Figure 1-4, HP 2623A Keyboard
(if you order the standard USASCII keyboard, however,
then you must explicitly order the extended character set if
you want it included). When your terminal includes the
i i —
extended character set you can select any of the following
languages using the configuration process:
USASCII (United States)
Swedish/Finnish
Danish/Norwegian
French AZERTY layout with mute keys
French QWERTY layout with mute keys
French AZERTY layout without mute keys
French QWERTY layout without mute keys
(arm an
— + E LALA LL
United Kingdom
Spanish with mute keys
Spanish without mute keys
FUNCTION KEYS
Across the top of the keyboard are eight keys labeled ME
through MEM (figure 1-5). The functions performed by
these keys change dynamically as you use the terminal. At
any given time the applicable function labels for these keys
appear across the bottom of the display screen.
When you press the % key, the eight function keys become
mode selection keys (figure 1-6). In this capacity you may
use the keys to enable and disable various terminal operat-
ing modes (such as remote mode and display functions
mode). Each mode selection key alternately enables and
disables a particular mode. When the mode is enabled, an
asterisk appears in the associated key label on the screen.
At power-on, through MEN are automatically ini-
tialized as mode selection keys.
Figure 1-5. Function Keys and Screen Labels
General Description
AUTO
_ LE
LINE TA BLOCK || REMOTE TERMINAL MEMORY DISPLAY
MUNIF Y MALL MODE ER LS
Figure 1-6. Mode Selection Key Labels
When you press the E key, the eight function keys be-
come general control keys that you use for configuring the
terminal, setting and clearing margins and tab stops,
accessing the Service Keys, and accessing the Device Con-
trol group of keys. The entire set of system function key
labels for each terminal is illustrated in figure 1-7. Press-
ing EY always reinitializes ME through to the top
row of functions (labels) shown in figure 1-7.
In using the system function keys, keep in mind the follow-
ing two conventions:
1. If a key label contains any lowercase letters, pressing
the key will transfer you to another level of system
function keys.
2. If a key label contains only uppercase letters, pressing
the key will perform the function defined in the key
label.
The key corresponding to AUTO LF for example, sets the
automatic line feed function on; whereas the key corres-
ponding toconfig. keys transfers you to the configuration
function keys.
When you press the and 83 keys simultaneously, the
user keys definition menu (figure 1-8) appears on the
screen. By filling in this menu you can define the screen
label and functional characteristics for eight user keys. To
enable the eight user keys, press the E keys. Figure 1-9
shows the default user key screen labels and figure 1-10
shows some sample user-defined user key screen labels.
Pressing the and E keys removes the key labels
from the screen. The User function keys, however, are
still enabled. To re-enable the labels, press E, CS, or
63.
Refer to Section III for a complete description of the func-
tion keys and information on defining these keys.
CONFIGURING THE TERMINAL
The terminal contains no physical straps or switches (other
than the ON/OFF switch on the rear panel). You configure
the terminal through the use of a configuration menu
displayed on the screen.
Refer to Section II for complete information on configuring
the terminal.
1-5
General Description
[+1] [fe] [+3]
function is active or enabled.
**This only appears on the HP 2623A.
LINE MODIFY BLOCK REMOTE
CONTROL PAGE
DEVICE
MODES x
TO Poo
DEVICES TE АНИ
||
MARGINS
TABS/COL
CONFIG
SAVE
CONFIG CONFIG
SHIFT DE FALILT
USER VALUES
KEYS
SERVICE
[+6] [+7] [FO]
MEMORY MUISPLAY AUTO
LOCKX MFUNCTNS LEX
STO COPY COPY
LINE ALL PAGE
Е
LOG LOG EXPAND COMPRES REPORT METRIC
BOTTOM ТОР* PRINT PRINT PRINT PRINT
L J
LI Y RIGHT CLR AL
MARGIN MARGIN MMARGINS
DISPLAY
FUNCTNS
TERMI NAL IT DENTIF
TEST ROMS
NOTES
1. An asterisk (*) in a label indicates an asterisk will be present in the label on the display when the
2. Labels surrounded by double lines are blank if no integral printer option is present.
3. The TO EXT DEV label is blank in the HP 2622A.
Figure 1-7. HP 2622A and HP 2623A Function Key Hierarchy
INTEGRAL PRINTER
The optional integral printer is a fast, quiet, bidirectional
thermal printing unit that can be used for generating
reproducible copy from the terminal’s display memory or
from a remote computer.
The integral printer can reproduce any character capable
of being displayed on the terminal’s screen, including the
line drawing character set and international characters.
Using either the system function keys or escape sequences,
you can select the integral printer as the destination
1-6
device for data transfers. Having done so, you can then
perform any of the following types of data transfers using
either the system function keys or escape sequences:
¢ Print the data in compressed, expanded or normal mode.
* Copy one line from the display.
e Copy all lines visible in the display.
e Copy all data from the current cursor line through the
end of display memory.
ео Ш LABEL I
2 J LABEL НИ
Ч ÿ LAEEL E
ка Ш све! me
ES LABEL E
=, LABEL I
1° LABEL I
Figure 1-8. User Keys Definition Menu
HE IE A
Figure 1-9. Default User Key Labels
LOC UN INITIATE DELETE ZI ATSPLAYELIEST AI NANA FIR
УЗИ а Те NE Wl ORI 11:30 4 ORDER ORUER DRTE RS
Figure 1-10. Sample User-Supplied User Key Labels
e Copy all of display memory.
e Copy all of graphics memory (HP 2623A only).
In addition, the integral printer offers both report mode
and metric mode. When report mode is enabled, the inte-
gral printer output is formatted as a series of 8%2 inch x 11
inch pages with a top and bottom margin and a tic mark
between successive pages. Metric mode produces similar
output except that the pages are Tonger (report mode —-
generates 60 lines of text per page while metric mode
generates 64 lines of text per page).
You can also enable data logging to occur from either the
top or bottom of display memory. With top logging, any
data that is forced off the top of display memory is directed
General Description
to the integral printer. With bottom logging, any data
added to display memory, either from the keyboard or from
a datacomm port, is also directed to the printer.
Refer to Section V for additional information on the inte-
gral printer.
EXTERNAL PRINTER PORT
(HP 2623A Only)
The external printer port at the rear of the HP 2623A
terminal provides for interfacing RS-232C printers. The
port may be configured to operate from 110 to 9600 baud;
choice of 0's, 1's, odd, even, or no parity; 0 to 255 nulls;
choice of XON/OFF, SRR, or CS/CB handshaking.
The terminals electrical interface conforms to EIA RS-
232C and CITT V.24 communications interface
specifications. |
Information on configuring the external printer port is
contained in Section V.
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
The terminal can operate at speeds ranging from 110 to
9600 baud.
Transmission can be performed in character mode, block
line mode, or block page mode; in all cases the data may be
either formatted (a data entry form with unprotected and
protected fields) or unformatted.
Using the configuration process, you may enable the
following forms of parity generation and checking:
None
Odd
Even
Ones (8th bit forced to 1)
Zeros (8th bit forced to 0)
The terminal's electrical interface adheres to EIA
RS-232C and CCITT V.24 communications interface
specifications.
Refer to Section VI for complete information on data
communications.
SELF-TEST
The terminal is engineered for high reliability, ease of
testing, and rapid repair.
When the terminal’s power is first turned on, a power-on
self-test automatically verifies the integrity of all ROM
(Read-Only Memory) and RAM (Random-Access Memory)
chips within the terminal. The power-on self-test also does
a verification of the configuration data stored in the non-
volatile memory.
1-7
General Description
Using the system function keys, you may also initiate any
of the following self-tests:
1. Datacomm Test. This is a very flexible forms-selected
test that verifies the integrity of either data communi-
cations port. Loop-back via a test hood or a modem may
be performed.
2. Terminal Test. This self-test does a CRC verification
of all ROM chips within the terminal, non-
destructively verifies the integrity of all RAM chips
within the terminal, and then displays a test pattern
on the screen. The test pattern includes all characters
(and segments in the case of the line drawing set) as well
as all the character enhancements.
3. Printer Self-Test. This self-test verifies the proper oper-
ation of the integral printer. A test pattern containing a
variety of characters in standard, compressed, and ex-
panded format is printed.
4. Identify ROMs. This self-test generates a listing (on the
display screen) of all installed ROMs.
See Section VIII for complete information concerning the
various self-tests.
1-8
ESCAPE CODES
Escape codes allow terminal operations to be executed
from a program. When a terminal receives an escape code
from an executing program, it performs the operation
specified in the escape code.
Escape code operations consist of most of the operations
performable at the terminal using the non-alphanumeric
keyboard keys.
All escape codes begin with the escape character
(associated with the [ESC] key), followed by the body of the
escape code. The body of the code can consist of one or
more of the keyboard letters and symbols. Most escape
codes can also be performed by entering them from the
keyboard. Refer to the appendix for a list of escape codes
and their functions.
NOTE
If the body of an escape code consists of
more than one character and ends in a
letter, the terminating letter must be
capitalized; otherwise, the escape code
will not be recognized as such. For exam-
ple, Y + dA (not © + da).
Configuring the Terminal
SECTION
INTRODUCTION
The terminal is designed so that the various terminal char-
acteristics can be configured quickly and easily by display-
ing configuration “menus” on the screen and then using
system function switches to change the content of these
menus. Thus altered, the terminals configuration charac-
teristics are stored in non-volatile memory.
The content of these menus may also be altered from a
program executing in a host computer through the use of
escape sequences. The changes made by the host computer
are temporary and will be lost through hard reset or power
down.
CONFIGURATION FUNCTION KEYS
To gain access to the configuration menus through the
keyboard, press the key. This causes the following
label display across the bottom of the screen ( MS, EN,
etc., refer to the function key corresponding to the label):
[+11 [+2] [f3] [F4]
device Mmargin7 Mservice -
control Mtab7col keys
[£35] [+6] [+6]
config
keys
NOTE
The device control softkey is present only
on terminals equipped with the optional
integral printer.
Pressing conf ig. keys changes the label display to
[+1] [#3] [+4]
datacommlext dev
config A
[#5] [fa]
terminal
config
Pressing datacomm config (ME ), ext dev config
(IE ) or terminal config (JJ ) causes a configura-
tion “menu” to appear on the screen and redefines the
function keys to a set of functions that will assist you in
manipulating the various parameters within the menu.
The datacomm menu is described in Section VI, Data
Communications. The ext dev config is described in Sec-
tion V, Printer Control. The terminal configuration menu
is described in this section. In addition, information is
provided which will enable you to change the terminal
configuration menu from the keyboard.
TERMINAL CONFIGURATION MENU
When you press the terminal config. ( ) function
key, the menu and function key display shown in figure 2-1
or figure 2-2 appear on the screen. Note that the menu as
shown in figure 2-1 contains the default settings for all the
fields. If you had previously changed the content of any of
the fields and then saved the menu in non-volatile memory,
the menu would appear on the screen as you had configured
it.
Language
ReturnDef
LocalEcho БЕН CapsLock Ltr
XmitFnctn(A) = SPOW(B) —
InhHndShk<G> [F Inh DC2(H) EN
FldSeparator E EBlkTermnator В
E ] EXI]
=] PTFÉICE
"КР МТ Ч
СЕСТСЕ
TERT
VPLLES |
TERMINAL CONFIGURATION
InhEollrp(C)
FrameRate
ASCII & Bit IN
Ц Line/Page(D) [1]
Start Col Of
ZA
“FLEY со
NCIS Ke
|
1
В
Figure 2-1. HP 2622A Terminal Configuration Menu
2-1
Configuring the Terminal
TERMINAL
Language | LSASCIT |]
ReturnCef & |
LacalEcho LFF Capslock L
XmitFnctn(A) (ND SPERCE)
InhkHndShk<G)? | Ni] Inh CC2(H) EN
FIdSeparator № BlkTermnator E
CONF IGUEARTICN
Framekate
UN
NL
Start Col Pscii 8 Bit [NC
InhEclldrp(C) Line/Fage(D) L1H
Compat(F,L) Per |
Евс Х{ег М)
NEXT REVICUS CEFALL Y НИИ ASPLÓY | | confia
CHUICE | | CHCICE VALUES | UNC TNS keys |
Figure 2-2. HP 2623A Terminal Configuration Menu
NOTE cursor is positioned in the fields labeled “Return Def”,
Whenever a configuration menu is on the
screen, no escape sequences are pro-
cessed, and no incoming or outgoing data
is processed, until the menu is exited.
The menu contains a set of unprotected fields that you
access using the and keys. Except when the
“FldSeparator”, or “BlkTermnator”, the alphanumeric
keys are disabled and you select the desired parameters
using the NEXT CHOICE ( MEM) and PREVIOUS CHOICE
( ) function keys.
The meanings of the various fields are described in
table 2-1.
Table 2-1. Terminal Configuration Menu Fields
FrameRate
RETURN def
LocalEcho
This field specifies what line frequency (50 or 60 Hz) the terminal is designed to operate at. The
screen refresh rate is then synchronized to the specified frequency. If this field is set to the wrong
value, the images on the screen will pulsate visibly (this will not happen until the save config key is
pressed).
Values: 50 (for 50 Hz power source)
60 (for 60 Hz power source)
The FrameRate can be temporarily selected with the following escape sequences:
Tak 1J= 50 Hz
Tak 0J = 60 Hz
Detault: 60
This field specifies the definition of the {RS key. The default definition is an ASCH %. The definition
may consist of up to two characters. lf the second character is a space, it is ignored.
Default: %
This field specifies whether characters entered through the keyboard are both displayed on the
screen and transmitted to the host computer.
ON (Sek 1L)
Characters entered through the keyboard are both displayed on the screen and transmitted to
the host computer.
2-2
Configuring the Terminal
Table 2-1. Terminal Configuration Menu Fields (Continued)
OFF (tek OLI
Characters entered through the keyboard are transmitted to the host computer only (if they are
to appear on the screen, the host computer must “echo” them back to the terminal).
Default: OFF
Caps Lock This field specifies whether the terminal generates the full 128-character ASCII set or only Teletype-
compatible codes.
ON (kek 10)
The terminal generates only Teletype-compatible codes: uppercase ASCII (00-5F, hex) and DEL
{7F, nex). Unsnifted aipnabetic keys (a-2) generate the codes for their uppercase equivaienis.
the {, |, and } keys generate the codes for I, \; and J, respectively. The key for generating ~and
“is disabled.
OFF Ct ek 00)
The terminal generates the full 128-character ASCII set of codes.
Defauit: OFF
Start Col If the line in which you are entering data is the bottommost used line in display memory (there are
no printing or non-printing characters following the current line in display memory), the terminal
automatically generates a logical start-of-text pointer to designate the leftmost character that you
enter in the line. This pointer remains with the line in display memory until the line is deleted.
When you are operating in MODIFY LINE or MODIFYALL mode and you press MEN or GI, the
data transmission from the terminal normally begins at the logical start-of-text pointer in the
particular line. If the line has no logical start-of-text pointer, however, the data transmission begins
at the designated start column. This designated start column can be defined and saved in
non-volatile memory using the StartCol field of the terminal configuration menu. The active value
of this field can also be temporarily redefined using one of the “margin/tab/col” function keys.
Values: 1-80
Default: 1
XmitFnetn(A) This field specifies whether escape code functions are both executed at the terminal and transmit-
ted to the host computer.
YES Cr és 1A)
The escape code sequences generated by control keys such as В and are transmitted to
the host computer. If local echo is ON, the function is also performed locally.
NO Cr am 06)
The escape code sequences for the major function keys are executed locally but NOT transmit-
ted to the host computer.
Note that display functions will emit t Z, Y Y to a host computer.
Default: NO
SPOWCB) This field specifies whether or not spaces entered through the keyboard will overwrite existing
characters.
NO Cr 45 0D)
Spaces entered through the Keyboard will overwrite existing characters.
YES (tes 1B)
Enable SPace OverWrite (SPOW) latch. When the SPOW latch is off, overwriting occurs as
normal. When the SPOW latch is on, spaces entered through the keyboard move the cursor
forward but do not overwrite existing characters. Once the SPOW latch has been enabled by the
2-3
Configuring the Terminal
Table 2-1. Terminal Configuration Menu Fields (Continued)
InhEolWrp€C)
Line/Page(D)
InhHndShk(G)
and
Inh DC2CH)
above escape sequence, it is turned on by a carriage return and is turned off by a line feed,
home up, or tab. It may also be turned on and off programmatically through the use of an © ak
sequence as follows:
ON: “Tak IN
OFF: "tek ON
Default: NO
This field specifies whether or not the end-of-line wrap is inhibited.
NO Cas 00)
When the cursor reaches the right margin it automatically moves to the left margin in the next
lower line (a local carriage return and line feed are generated).
YES CT ás 1C)
When the cursor reaches the right margin it remains in that screen column until an explicit
carriage return or other cursor movement function is performed (succeeding characters over-
write the existing character in that screen column).
Default: NO
This field specifies whether or not the terminal, when operating in block mode, will transmit data a
line at a time or a page at a time.
Line Ces 0D)
When operating in block mode, the terminai will transmit data a line at a time.
Page (cas 1D)
When operating in block mode, the terminal will transmit data a page at a time.
For a detailed description of the differences between block line and block page mode, refer to
“ENTER KEY” in Section II! of this manual.
Default: LINE
Together, these fields determine what type of handshaking is to be used when transferring blocks
of data from the terminal to the host computer.
The various types of block transfers that may occur are as follows:
A data transfer initiated by pressing the key in character, block line, or block page mode.
e A data transfer initiated by pressing the or key in modify mode.
A data transfer initiated by pressing a transmit only (T) user key (lil through MEE).
The terminal's response to a cursor sense, terminal ID status, primary status, secondary status,
or device status request issued from the host computer.
e The device contro! completion code (S,F, or U) transmitted by the terminal in conjunction with a
device control operation initiated by the host computer.
When performing block transfers, there are three possible handshakes:
1. No handshake; terminal merely transmits block of data.
2. Computer sends? ; terminal transmits block of data.
3. Computer sends 9; terminal responds with %; computer responds with another 9; terminal
transmits block of data.
2-4
Configuring the Terminal
Table 2-1. Terminal Configuration Menu Fields (Continued)
NOTE
When the® % % handshake is enabied and the iine/page fieid of terminai config
is selected to be “line”, a % or % tr is transmitted after the %. If “line” is not
selected, nothing is transmitted after %.
In general, the InhHndShk(G) and Inh >CH) fields have the following effects:
InhHndShk(G) = YES Eliminates the use of the® handshake (terminal will either use the? /%/®,
handshake or no handshake at all).
Inh DC2CH) = YES Eliminates the use of the?,/2P. handshake (terminai wili either use the,
handshake or no handshake at all).
Both = YES No handshake.
Specifically, however, the type of handshaking used for block transfers is determined by a combi-
nation of the following factors:
1. The type of block transfer to be performed.
2. What mode the terminal is currently operating in (character, block line, block page, or modify
mode).
3. The setting of the InhHndShk(G) and Inh RCH) fields.
If your terminal is connected to a Hewlett-Packard computer system, you will find that the default
settings for these fields (both NO) are usually adequate for your purposes. If you are concerned
about the specific type of handshake to be used for one or more of the particular types of block
transfers, however, you should use the following summary to verify (or alter) the settings of the
InhHndShk(G) and Inh Z(H) fields:
1. MN key in block mode; or
К ог key in modify mode; or
Transmit only (T) user key in block page mode.
InhHndShk(G) (ignored)
Inh BCH) = NO > %%/,
Inh B(H) = YES — no handshake
2. key in character mode.
InhHndShk(G) = YES
Inh 3>CH) = NO — 9,/%/,
Any other combination — no handshake
3. Transmit only (T) user key in block line or character mode; or
Cursor sense, terminal ID status, primary status, secondary status, display transfer initiated by%d
or device status request; or
InhHndShk (6) = NO > %
InhHndShk(G) = YES
Inh RCH) = NO — 0/0,
2-5
Configuring the Terminal
Table 2-1. Terminal Configuration Menu Fields (Continued)
FldSeparator
BlkTermnator
Language
InhHndShk(G) = YES
Inh &(H) = YES — no handshake
The G and H selections can be temporarily selected by the following escape sequences:
54506 disables G
545 0H disables H
Tas 16 enables G
%4¢s 1H enables H
Defaults: InhHndShk(G) = NO
Inh& (HY) = NO
When you press the key while the terminal is in block page mode and display memory
contains a formatted display, the terminal automatically transmits the specified field separator
character at the end of each protected field (except the final one).
Value: Any ASCII character
Default: 4
For data transfers between the terminal and a host computer, the terminal (under certain
circumstances) transmits the specified block terminator character at the end of the transfer
operation. For details, see “The ENTER Key” in Section III.
This character, when encountered in display memory, terminates a data transfer ( MEN key
transmissions).
Value: Any ASCII character
Default: %
As will be described in Appendix B, Keyboards and Character Sets, of this manual, the HP 2622A or
the HP 2623A can be ordered with any of the following keyboards:
United States (standard)
Swedish/Finnish (option 001)
Danish/Norwegian {option 002)
French (option 003)
German (option 004)
United Kingdom (option 005)
Spanish (option 006)
With any of the optional keyboards the terminal automatically includes an extended character set
that supports the special characters associated with all of the international languages. With the
United States keyboard, however, it includes the extended character set only if you have spe-
cifically ordered it.
When the extended character set is present you may configure the terminal so that the various keys
are interpreted (and displayed) in any desired language regardless of which physical keyboard is
being used. For example, with a United States keyboard you could configure the terminal so that it
responds to the keys as though they were on a German or French or Danish/Norwegian keyboard.
This field specifies which national keyboard format is to be used in interpreting keystrokes.
Values:
USASCIT (United States)
SVENSK/SUOMI (Swedish/Finnish)
FRANCAIS azM (French AZERTY layout with mutes)
Configuring the Terminal
Table 2-1. Terminal Configuration Menu Fields (Continued)
Esc Xfer(N)
(HP 2623A only)
ASCII BBits
Compat (P,Q)
(HP 2623A only)
FRANCAIS qwM (French QWERTY layout with mutes)
FRANCAIS az (French AZERTY layout)
FRANCAIS gw (French QWERTY layout)
DEUTSCH (German)
UK (United Kingdom)
ESPANOL M(Spanish with mutes)
ESPANOL (Spanish)
For the French keyboard layouts, the AZERTY and QWERTY designations refer to the location of
the A, Z, Q, and W keys as follows:
AZERTY: Row3=-AZERTY
Row2=-QOSD(Cetc.)
Row 1 =WXC(Cetc.)
GWERTY: Row3=QWERTY
Row2= ASD(etc.)
Row 1 =Z2XCCetc.)
For the French and Spanish keyboard layouts, the mutes designation refers to the manner in which
certain accent character keystrokes are handled ( * and * on the French layout and ’ on the
Spanish). If the mutes are enabled, those keystrokes will generate the particular accent character
but will NOT move the cursor. If you then type an applicable vowel, the vowel will appear in the same
character position as the accent and the cursor then moves to the next column (if you type any
character other than an applicable vowel, however, the character will replace the accent
character).
This field is the functional equivalent of keyboard interface strap N on an HP 2645 terminal.
YES (kas 1N) = When transferring data from display memory to an external printer, escape
sequences relating to the display (such as those specifying display enhance-
ments, format mode fields, and alternate character sets) are sent to the external
printer if encountered within the data.
NO (Cas ON) = Escape sequences relating to the display are not sent to the external printer.
NOTE: The Esc Xfer(N) field only affects data transfers between display
memory and an external printer. It does NOT affect <Esc>&pW data
transfers that go directly from the host computer to the external printer.
Default: NO
When this operating mode is enabled (= YES), the terminal transmits 8-bitASCil codes in which the
eighth (high-order) bit, when set (=1), indicates that the character is from the alternate character
set. This is a Hewlett-Packard convention and you will ordinarily use it only when communicating
with certain HP line printers (such as the HP 2635A Printing Terminal).
Values: YES (%&k 11) = 8-bit codes.
NO (k&k 01) = Standard 7-bit codes.
NOTE: When using 8-bit mode, parity should be set to NONE; otherwise, one
bit will be used as the parity bit. Aliso, whenever 8-bit mode is selected,
- Extended Roman is.the default alternate character set; if 7-bitmodeis ...
selected, Line Drawing Set is the default alternate character set.
This field is the functional equivalent of keyboard straps P and Q in the HP 2647A and HP 2648A
Graphics Terminals. Either UNSCALED or SCALED entries cause the terminal to enter Com-
patibility Mode which allows the terminal to respond to graphics control codes for the Tektronix
4010 and 4012 terminals. (Compatibility Mode is explained in detail in Section X.)
2-7
Configuring the Terminal
Table 2-1. Terminal Configuration Menu Fields (Continued)
UNSCALED C'T&s0p 1G)
on
SCALED (&ss1p 00)
OFF (%asOp 0Q orfasip 1Q)
Graphics display shows a 512 by 390 subset of the 1024 by 780 address-
ble points used in the Tektronix terminalis.
Graphics display shows a scaled down (512 x 390) version of the 1024 x
780 addressable points used in the Tektronix terminals. The entire picture
is displayed at approximately 2 the resolution.
Turns off Compatibility Mode.
Note that as you alter the fields of a configuration menu on
the screen, the selected values do NOT alter the content of
non-volatile memory nor do they have any effect on the
operation of the terminal.
When you have set all the fields to the desired values, you
may then save them in non-volatile memory using the
save conf ig (MEME ) function key.
When you do this, the chosen values take effect immedi-
ately.
While the terminal configuration menu is displayed on the
screen, the MEN, MEN, HE, MEN. and function
keys perform as shown in table 2-2.
Table 2-2. Configuration Function Keys E, HEN,
YALUES
Pressing this key causes all fields in the menu on the screen to be filled with their default values.
(For default values, see figure 2-1 or figure 2-2.)
Pressing this key alternately enables and disables display functions mode. When enabled, an
asterisk appears in the function key display. You use display functions mode for entering ASCII
control characters in the Return Def, F1 dSeparator, or BlkTermnator fields. Note that this imple-
mentation of display functions mode is separate from that which is enabled/disabled via the mode
selection keys. Enabling or disabling display functions mode using this function key does NOT
alter the effect of the DISPLAY FUNCTNS mode selection key (and vice versa).
[+1]
[+5]
Pressing this key removes the menu from the screen (WITHOUT activating it or saving it in
non-volatile memory) and returns the function key labels to the following:
[+2]
datacommlext dev ©
config config
[+6]
terminal
config
*ext dev config only on the HP 2623A.
[+3] [+4]
[#7] [+83
Lock/Unlock Configuration Menus
Ising an escape sequence, you can “lock” the current con-
figuration menus (terminal config or datacomm config) so
that the menu can not be accessed from the kevboard. Any
attempt to access a locked menu from the keyboard will
result in a “beep” from the bell. Note that when the configu-
ration menus are locked, the MODIFY ALL ( JE), BLOCK
MODE ( MEE), REMOTE MODE ( EEN), AUTO LF (MEM) mode
selection keys are also locked.
To lock the menus, use the following escape sequence:
Ét&g 1L
To unlock the menus, use the following escape sequence:
Tr &q OL
SETTING CONFIGURATION
PARAMETERS WITH ESCAPE CODES
To set the terminal configuration parameters using escape
codes, you must use an t4k or tés sequence, depending
upon which parameters you wish to set.
Parameter Name Type of Escape
As Shown in Menu Sequence Used
FrameRate Tak
LocalEcho
Caps Lock
ASCII 8-bit
SPOWLatch
XmitFnctnCA) T ás
SPGWCB)
InhEolWrpCC)
Line/Page(D)
InhHndShk CG)
Inh % CH)
Esc Xfer(N)
Compat (P,Q)
(HP 2623A only)
(HP 2623A only)
Theft sk and% &s sequences alter the particular parameter
in the menu, and the new setting takes effect immediately,
but they do NOT alter the content of non-volatile memory.
To change the active values of theFrameRate,LocalEcho,
CapsLock,ASCII8-bit,orSPOW parameters, use an escape
sequence of the following form:
FrameRate 60: “ak OJ
FrameRate = 50: &k1J
LocalEcho >DFF: &4Kk0L
LocalEcho = ON: “ak 1L
Configuring the Terminal
Caps Lock =OFF: “ek OC
Caps Lock = ON: Ffak1C
ASCII 8-bit =YES: “ak 11
ASCIITB-bit — NO: Est O!
SPOWLatch: &&k ON
&&k 1N
You may combine these and other t4k parameters within
one escape sequence. If you do, the final identifier (such as
C or I orL) must be uppercase and all preceding identifiers
must be lowercase. For example, to setLocalEcho = ON and
Caos! ah — MIS сте леса ТА 1100 nithar af tha falIlaain escane
psLock =0N, you could use either of the following escape
sequences:
sk 111C
Et&k 1c1L
To change the active values of any of the following
parameters, use an escape sequence of the following form:
XmitFnctnCA) = NO: “res 0A
XmitFnctnCA) = YES: “ras 1A
SPOWCB) = NO: “as OB
SPOWCB) = YES: &&s 1B
InhEolWrpCC) = NO: ES OC
InhEolWrpCC) = YES: Eas 1C
Line/Page(D) =LINE: “trás OD
Line/Page(D) =PAGE: %&s 1D
InhHNdShk(G) = NO: 58506
InhHndShk CG) = YES: “4516
Inh%CH) = NO: “as OH
Inh % CHI) = YES: “c&s 1H
(The following two functions apply to the HP 2623A only.)
EscXfer(N) = NO: “ras ON
Esc Xfer (N) = YES: Eés 1N
Compat (P,Q)
Compat (P,Q)
Compat (P,Q)
OFF: “сё Ор 0Q orf&stp1Q
UNSCALED: É&s0p 1Q
SCALED: с &51р 00
You may combine these and other T&s parameters within
one escape sequence. If you do, the final identifier (such as
À or G orH) must be uppercase and all preceding identifiers
must be lowercase. For example, to set Line/Page(D) =
PAGE, InhHndShkCG) = NO, and Inh %(H) = YES, you could
use any of the following escape sequences:
4s 1d Og 1H
© &as0gthHID
B45 1h 1d 0G
2-9/2-10
SECTION
Keyboard Control
INTRODUCTION
The terminal keyboard is a separate unit that is linked
to the display portion of the terminal by a flexible cable.
Included within the keyboard unit is a speaker that is used
for sounding the terminal’s bell tone. Except for two keys
D, the overall keyboard can be logically
ие еее WV Sra AA LE AN а ее се бо
and
E. A Nl
divided into a character set group, a numeric pad or graph-
ics pad group, a cursor control group, an edit control group,
and a function key group. The function key group includes
eight keys labeled “f1” through “f8” and the keys labeled
“AIDS”, “MODES” and “USER KEYS”. The [fl] through IRN
keys are multi-purpose keys in that the functions they
perform vary from one situation to another. At any given
time the applicable labels for the function keys are dis-
played across the bottom of the screen (figure 3-1).
(A
`
SELECTING MODES
Pressing the key enables the mode selection keys
and changes the through ШВ screen labels to the
following:
[#11 [+2] [43] [+4]
(BN MOUDIF Y Bi UCK A IRE
MODIE Y lL PO DE MODE
[+5] [+6] [7] [+8]
ТЕ МЫ AS DIS AHY EL
LI LEN ЛЬ
Except for the TERMINAL TEST key (which initiates the
terminal self-test), these keys act as toggle switches in that
they alternately enable and disable the designated mode.
When a particular mode is enabled, an asterisk is displayed
in the label.
The graphics functions of the graphics/numeric keypad are
in effect when the terminal is powered on or after a hard
reset. Also, E toggles the keypad functions be-
tween graphics and numeric functions.
Remote/Local Modes
When a communications link exists between the terminal
and a remote host computer, the terminal is in either of the
following two modes:
e Remote Mode. In this mode, when you press an alpha-
numeric key the associated ASCII code is transmitted to
the host computer.
e Local Mode. In this mode, when you press an alphanu-
meric key the associated character is displayed at the
current cursor position on the screen (nothing is trans-
mitted to the host computer).
Figure 3-1. Screen-Labeled Function Keys
From the keyboard, you switch the terminal back and forth
between local and remote modes using the REMOTE MODE
(ME) key.
From the keyboard or a user-definable key, you can switch
the terminal from local to remote (and vice versa) using the
following escape sequences:
Local:
Remote:
Er Ak OR
ak 1R
A remote/local mode designator is maintained in non-
volatile memory. When you change modes using the
REMOTE MODE key, you also alter that mode designator in
non-volatile memory. When you change modes using the
escape sequences, however, the designator in non-volatile
memory is NOT altered.
After a hard reset or turning off the power, the terminal
reverts to the mode specified by the remote/local designator
in non-volatile memory.
Character/Block Modes
When the terminal is connected on-line to a remote host
computer, it operates in either of the following data trans-
mission modes:
e Character Mode. In this mode, data is transmitted a
character at a time as it is entered through the keyboard.
ASCII control codes (such as ® and'r ) are transmitted.
3-1
Keyboard Control
¢ Block Mode. In this mode, data is NOT transmitted at
the time it is entered through the keyboard. Instead, you
transmit an entire block of data by first typing the data
(after initially typing the data you can move the cursor
around and edit the data as desired) and then pressing
the key.
When the terminal is in block mode, ASCII control codes
(such as and"r ) are acted upon locally but NOT transmit-
ted with the data block.
From the keyboard, you enable and disable block mode
using the BLOCK MODE (AM) key.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable block mode using the following escape se-
quences:
ENABLE: %&k 1B
DISABLE: %&k 0B
A character/block mode designator is maintained in non-
volatile memory. When you change modes using the BLOCK
MODE key, you also alter that mode designator in non-
volatile memory. When you change modes using the escape
sequences, however, the designator is NOT altered.
After a hard reset or turning off the power, the terminal
reverts to the mode specified by the character/block desig-
nator in non-volatile memory.
The relationship between block, line, page, and format
modes is described under key later in this section.
Format Mode
The terminal includes a format mode in which elaborate,
custom-designed forms containing protected and unpro-
tected fields can be displayed on the screen and used for
data entry.
When format mode is enabled, the terminal operator may
only enter data into unprotected fields. If the operator
positions the cursor in a protected area and then attempts
to type data, the cursor automatically moves to the start of
the next subsequent unprotected field before the terminal
accepts the data.
The designing of forms and the use of format mode are
described in Section IV.
From a program executing in a host computer or from the
keyboard, you enable and disable format mode using the
following escape sequences:
ENABLE: “EW
DISABLE: Ex
Once format mode is enabled, it remains enabled until
explicitly disabled, until a hard reset is performed, or until
the power is turned off.
3-2
Line Modify Mode
When the terminal is in remote mode and character mode,
and you are communicating interactively with a host com-
puter, you may sometimes enter an erroneous command
string to which the computer responds with an error mes-
sage. If the command string is a lengthy one and the error
consists of only a few characters, it is a nuisance to have to
retype the entire string. In such a case, you may instead
enable line modify mode (which temporarily switches the
terminal to a special form of block mode). You may then
move the cursor to the erroneous line on the display and
correct the command string. When the string
is edited to your satisfaction, you retransmit the line
to the host computer by pressing either the CD key or the
EXA key.
Note that while line modify mode results in a block trans-
mission, it is completely independent of the block mode
function described earlier in this section (you do NOT have
to first enable block mode). In fact, line modify mode is a
feature that was specifically designed for use when the
terminal is operating in character mode.
From the keyboard, you enable line modify mode using the
LINE MODIFY key. Line modify mode is automatically dis-
abled when you press either or SEN. If you change
your mind and wish to disable line modify mode before
retransmitting the command string, press the LINE
MODIFY key again and the terminal will return to normal
character mode.
The terminal remembers which character was the first
(leftmost) one that you entered through the keyboard. This
means that when you retransmit a line in modify mode,
only the keyboard entry portion of the line (the entire
edited command string) is retransmitted; any prompt
characters preceding the command string are ignored by
the terminal. For more detailed information about this
feature refer to the discussion of the Start Col field of the
terminal configuration menu in Section II.
Modify All Mode
When the terminal is in character mode, you can enable
modify all mode, which switches the terminal to a special
form of block mode. Modify all mode is the same as line
modify mode except that it is NOT disabled when you press
or BEN.
From the keyboard, you enable and disable modify all mode
using the MODIFY ALL key.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable modify all mode using the following escape
sequences:
ENABLE: “ak 1M
DISABLE: “ak OM
A modify all mode designator is maintained in non-volatile
memory. When you change modes using the MODIFY ALL
key, vou also alter that mode designator in non-volatile
memory. When you change modes using the escape se-
quences, however, the designator is NOT altered.
After a hard reset or turning off the power, the terminal
reverts to the mode specified by the modify all designator
in non-volatile memory.
NOTE
When using modify mode you will
usually want the data block (NOT a %
handshake control code) to be sent when
you press or Y. The default
configuration parameters, however,
enable the P12 handshake. There-
fore, in most cases you will first need
to disable the 2:2?; handshake before
using modify mode. You do so by setting
the Inh DC2(H) field in the terminal
configuration menu to “YES”, or by send-
ing trás 1H. The modify all and modify
line functions are ignored if the terminal
is in format or block mode.
Auto Line Feed Mode
When auto line feed mode is enabled, an ASCII line feed
control code is automatically appended to each ASCII car-
riage return control code generated through the keyboard.
That is, every R code generated through the keyboard be-
comes a er.
ASCII carriage return control codes can be generated
through the keyboard in any of the following ways:
o By pressing the UD key, provided that a R code is
included in the key definition.
¢ By simultaneously pressing the and {IP keys.
e By pressing any of the user keys (ME through IER),
provided that a % code is included in the particular key
definition.
e By pressing the RE key when the terminal is in block
mode, line modify mode, or modify all mode (in these
cases a ® code is transmitted as the line terminator).
From the keyboard, you enable and disable auto line feed
mode using the AUTOLF key.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable auto line feed mode using the following escape
sequences:
ENABLE: &e&k 1A
DISABLE: %&&k 0A
Keyboard Control
When you enable or disable auto line feed mode using the
“AUTO LF” key, you also alter the content of the “Autol F”
field in both active and non-volatile memory. When vou
enable or disable auto line feed mode using the escape
sequence, however, you only change the content of the
“Autol F” field in active memory.
After a hard reset or turning off the power, the terminal
reverts to the mode specified by the “AutoLF” field in non-
volatile memory.
Memory Lock Mode
Memory lock mode provides two separate functions: over-
flow protect and display lock.
OVERFLOW PROTECT. This feature prevents you from
losing data when display memory is full. If you home the
cursor and then enable memory lock mode, display memory
becomes “protected” so that no data can be lost off the top.
In such a case, when you have used all available lines in
display memory, any attempt to use more memory is rejec-
ted with an audible “beep”. You may, however, use the
cursor control keys to go back and alter any of the existing
data. To continue entering new data, merely disable
memory lock mode and reposition the cursor immediately
below the last line. Before doing so you may wish to enable
data logging (described in Section V) so that data that is
then forced off the top of display memory will be retained in
printed form.
DISPLAY LOCK. If you position the cursor below the top
line of the screen and then enable memory lock mode, the
lines above the cursor become “locked” on the screen. As the
screen becomes full, the locked lines remain on the screen
while subsequent lines roll past the locked rows. This al-
lows you to retain column headings or instructions on the
screen as you continue to enter new data. It also provides a
useful means of changing the sequence of text blocks as
follows:
a. Press MB, , and then type the following data:
3. This is paragraph 3. It
shouldbe the third one.
1. This is paragraph 1. It
should be the first one.
2. This is paragraph 2. It
should be the second one.
4. This is paragraph 4. Ii
shouldbe the last one.
b. Position the cursor in the first line of paragraph 1.
; СЭ
Enable memory lock mode. ~~ =
d. Use the key until the first line of paragraph 4 is in
the same line as the cursor.
e. Disable memory lock mode and home the cursor. The
display should appear as follows:
1. This is paragraph 1. It
shouldbethefirst one.
Keyboard Control
2. This is paragraph 2. It
should be the second one.
3. This is paragraph 3. It
should be the third one.
4. This is paragraph 4. It
shouldbe the last one.
From the keyboard, you enable and disable memory lock
mode using the MEMORY LOCK key. The rows above the line
containing the cursor are locked.
Normal editing can be performed within the locked rows;
that is, the rows are locked by row number only, so if lines
are inserted among the locked rows, they become locked
but the total number of locked rows does not increase.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable memory lock mode using the following escape
sequences:
ENABLE: il
DISABLE: "m
Once enabled, memory lock mode remains enabled until
explicitly disabled, until a hard reset is performed, or until
the power is turned off.
Display Functions Mode
When display functions mode is enabled the terminal
operates as follows:
® In local mode, it displays ASCII control codes and escape
sequences but does not execute them. For example, if you
press the El key the terminal displays tD on the
screen but does not perform the “cursor left” function.
e In remote mode, it transmits ASCII control codes and
escape sequences but does not execute them locally. For
example, if you press the key the terminal transmits
an*tS but does not perform the “roll up” function. If local
echo is enabled (ON) then the TS is also displayed on the
screen.
There are two exceptions to the foregoing descriptions:
1. An %2, which disables display functions mode, or &Y,
which enables display functions mode, is executed but is
not transmitted or displayed.
2. A% (or%‘r if auto line feed mode is enabled) is executed
in addition to being transmitted and displayed.
From the keyboard, you enable and disable display func-
tions mode using the DISPLAY FUNCTNS key.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable display functions mode using the following
escape sequences:
ENABLE: “EY
DISABLE: “EZ
NOTE
There is interaction between display
functions and the XmitFnctnCA) field
of the configuration menu. If
XmitFnctn(A) is on, the DISPLAY
FUNCTNS key transmits © Y, © Z. Note
that, as a result of this, the receiver of
the transmission can never exit display
functions.
Once enabled, display functions mode remains enabled
until explicitly disabled, until a soft or hard reset is per-
formed, or until the power is turned off.
Caps Mode
When caps mode is enabled, all unshifted alphabetic keys
generate uppercase letters and all shifted alphabetic keys
generate lowercase letters. This mode is used primarily as
a typing convenience and only affects the 26 alphabetic
keys.
From the keyboard, you enable and disable caps mode
using the key. This key alternately enables and dis-
ables caps mode. The key has no effect if “Caps Lock” in
terminal configuration is enabled (ON).
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable caps mode using the following escape
sequences:
ENABLE: “ak 1P
DISABLE: "ak OP
Once enabled, caps mode remains enabled until explicitly
disabled, until a hard reset is performed, or until the power
is turned off.
Caps Lock Mode
When caps lock mode is enabled, the terminal generates
only Teletype-compatible codes: uppercase ASCII (00-5F,
hex) and DEL (7F, hex). Unshifted alphabetic keys @-z )
generate the codes for their uppercase equivalents, the { , I,
and} keys generate the codes for { ,\, and 1 (respectively),
and the * and ~ keys are ignored.
From the keyboard, you enable and disable caps lock mode
using the “Caps Lock” field of the terminal configuration
menu described in Section II.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable caps lock mode using the following escape
sequences:
ENABLE: “ak 1C
DISABLE: &&k OC
At any given time the current state (enabled/disabled) of
caps lock mode is reflected in the “Caps Lock” field of the
terminal configuration menu. When you enable or disable
the mode by altering the menu field from the keyboard and
then pressing the SAVE CONFIG key, you alter both the
active and non-volatile memory versions of that field.
When you enable or disable the mode using the escape
sequence, however, you only change the active value of the
“Caps Lock” field in the terminal configuration menu.
After a hard reset or turning off the power, the terminal
reverts to the mode specified by the “Caps Lock” field in the
terminal configuration menu in non-volatile memory.
GRAPHICS/NUMERIC KEYPAD
ON THE HP 2623A
The graphics functions on the graphics/numeric keypad
are enabled when the terminal is powered on, after a hard
reset is performed, or when toggled by the El E keys.
e The [GRAPH DSPLY] key toggles the graphics memory
display on and off. This allows you to view the alpha-
numeric memory without the graphics memory overlay-
ing it.
* The [ALPHA DSPLY] key toggles the alphanumeric
memory on and off. This allows you to view the graphics
memory without the alphanumeric memory overlaying
it.
The [GRAPH CURSOR] key toggles the graphics cursor
on and off. Initially, the cursor is positioned in the lower-
left corner of the display.
* The BB. ES. UE, keys control the position of
the graphics cursor. Two keys may be pressed to cause
diagonal movement.
e The [CURSOR FAST] key allows you to position the
cursor (using the GB, G3, UE, keys simulta-
neously) at a more rapid rate.
eo The [GRAPH CLEAR] key clears the contents of graph-
ies memory.
e The [GRAPH COPY] key initiates a copy of the contents
of graphics memory to the selected “to” devices (either
the optional integral printer or the external device con-
nected to the external printer port).
You can toggle the graphics and numeric functions under
program control by sending the following escape
sequences:
4k 00
Ét&k10
Enable numeric functions:
Enable graphics functions:
Keyboard Control
USER-DEFINABLE KEYS
The eight function keys ( NES through ME ), besides per-
forming their usual terminal control functions, can be
defined either locally by the terminal operator or remotely
by a program executing in a host computer. By “defined” it
is meant that:
1. You can assign to each key a string of ASCII alphanu-
meric characters and/or control codes (such as % or‘s).
2. You can specify each key’s operational attribute:
whether its content is to be executed locally at the
terminal, transmitted to a host computer, or both.
. You can assign to each key an alphanumeric label (up to
16 characters) which, in user keys mode, is displayed
across the bottom of the screen.
со
When defining a key from the keyboard, the key content
may include explicit escape sequences (entered using dis-
play functions mode) that control or modify the terminals
operation.
The definition of each user key may contain up to 80
characters (alphanumeric characters, ASCII control
characters, and explicit escape sequence characters).
Defining Keys Locally
To define one or more keys from the keyboard, first press
the and keys simultaneously, or user j . The user
keys menu shown in figure 3-2 then appears on the screen.
Note that the menu in figure 3-2 contains the default
values for all of the fields. While the menu is displayed on
the screen, you can reset the entire menu to the default
values by pressing the DEFAULT VALUES function key
qt: E
The menu contains a set of unprotected fields that you
access using the and keys.
For each user key the menu contains four unprotected
fields:
ATTRIBUTE FIELD. This one-character field always
contains an uppercase L,T, or N signifying whether the
content of the particular user key is to be:
a. Executed locally only (L).
b. Transmitted to the host computer only (T).
c. Treated in the same manner as the alphanumeric
keys (N). If the terminal is in local mode, the content
of the key is executed locally. If the terminal is in
remote mode and local echo is disabled (OFF, the
content of the key is transmitted to the host com-
echo is enabled (ON), the content of the key is both
transmitted to the host computer and executed
locally.
The alphanumeric keys are disabled when the cursor is
positioned in this field. You change the content of this
3-5
Keyboard Control
KEY LABEL
DEFINITION ATTRIBUTE FIELDS
FIELD FIELD у
/ — —
f1 y LABEL MES ON
Tp
f2 Y LABEL I
Tq
f3 LABEL HEE TN
Er
f4 0 LABEL MES NE
Bes
{5 HU LABEL KEE HEE
Et
fe Ü LABEL I
Eu
+7 Ш LABEL I
Ev
{8 Ш LABEL I
DEF HUN I
E
SIR LI Rh
F UNC TNS
Figure 3-2. User Keys Definition Menu and Default User Key Labels
field by pressing the NEXT CHOICE and PREVIOUS CHOICE When the user keys menu is displayed on the screen you
keys (MÈRE and MEM, respectively). may use the HE, KM, and € keys for editing the
content of the label and key definition fields.
TWO LABEL FIELDS. The two eight-character fields
to the right of the word “LABEL ” allow you to supply the When you are finished defining all the desired keys, press
user key's label. When the terminal is in user keys mode, the ‚ {3 ‚ ог key (in all three cases the user keys
the key labels are displayed from left to right in ascend- menu disappears from the screen). When you press ‚ог
ing order across the bottom of the screen (each displayed enter tk, the defined user key labels are displayed across
key label occupies two lines). The first LABEL field in the bottom of the screen and the MN through ME user
the user keys menu supplies the upper portion of the keys, as defined by you, are enabled.
particular key label while the second supplies the lower
portion.
KEY DEFINITION FIELD. The entire line (80 Defining Keys Programmatically
characters) immediately below the attribute and label o
fields is available for specifying the character string From a program executing in a host computer, you can
that is to be displayed, executed, and/or transmitted define one or more keys using the following escape se-
whenever the particular key is physically pressed. quence format:
When entering characters into this field you may use
display functions mode. Ecaf <attribute><key><label length>
<string length><label><string>
When entering the label and key definition you may access
display functions mode by way of the DISPLAY FUNCTNS where:
function key (MI). Note that this implementation of
display functions mode is separate from that which is
enabled/disabled via the mode selection keys.
<attribute> = 0a: normal (0 is the default)
1a: local only
2a: transmit only
<key> = 1-8k: f1-f8, (1 is the default)
The can be used for including ® codes (with display respectively
functions mode enabled) in key definitions. If auto line feed Clabel length> = 0-16d (0 is the default)
mode is also enabled, the key will generate a *r, <string length» = 0-80L (1 is the default)
otherwise it is considered a cursor movement key. (—1 causes field to be erased)
3-6
<iabei> the character sequence for the
label field
mat tha Aharantar cañiianca far tha
кН LI WITT CAN LI > AU LA "lI
key definition field
mm:
TF al
The <attribute», <key>, <label length>, and «string
length> parameters may appear in any sequence but must
precede the label and key definition strings. You must use
an uppercase identifier (A,K,D, orL) for the final parameter
and a lowercase identifier (@, k, d, or 1) for all preceding
parameters. Following the parameters, the first 0 through
16 characters, as designated by <label length>, con-
stitute the key’s label and the next 0 through 80 characters,
as dacionated by €ætrino lenoth>, constitute the key’s
КАКО EVIL ALTA VS WE RS _ y ey a A a A LAIR
definition string. The total number of displayable charac-
ters (alphanumeric data, ASCII control codes such as% and
‘в, and explicit escape sequence characters) in the label
string must not exceed 16, and in the definition string must
not exceed 80.
Example: Assign LOG-ON as the label and HELLO
USER.ACCOUNT as the definition for the
user key. The key is to have the attribute "N”.
T&fSk6d19LLOG-ONHELLO USER. ACCOUNTAE& } B
After issuing the foregoing escape sequence from your pro-
gram to the terminal, the portion of the user keys
menu is as follows:
f5NLABEL LOG-ON
HELLO USER. ACCOUNT
Ifthe transmit only attribute (2) is designated, the particu-
lar user key will have no effect unless the terminal is in
remote mode. A transmit only user key may (when subse-
quently pressed) invoke a block transfer handshake and
append the appropriate terminator to the string. The
%&jB sequence turns on the user labels. If this escape se-
quence is not sent, the labels will not be updated unless
the E key is pressed twice.
Controlling the
User Keys Menu Programmatically
From a program executing in a host computer, you can
display the user keys menu on the screen and remove it
from the screen using the following escape sequences:
DISPLAY MENU: ®]
REMOVE MENU: %k
Controlling the
Function Key Labels Programmatically
From a program executing in a host computer, you can
control the function key labels display as follows by using
escape sequences:
Keyboard Control
e You can remove the key labels from the screen entirely
(this is the equivalent of simultaneously pressing the
| — _- 3] В Тент
and MB keys).
¢ You can enable the mode selection keys (this is the equiv-
alent of pressing the SB key).
e You can enable the user keys (this is the equivalent of
pressing the key).
* Youcan “lock” the current set of labels on the screen (i.e.,
disable the , , and keys).
e You can reenable the , , and keys.
The escape seguences are as follows:
Tajo Enable the user keys and remove all key
labels from the screen.
aja Enable the mode selection keys.
¢jB Enable the user keys.
5ER Unlock screen labels.
5&j5 Lock screen labels.
S&j<xx>L<message> Remove the key labels from the screen
and display the character string
<message> (which consists of <xx>
characters; where <xx> may be up to
160 characters).
5) С Remove your <message> from the
screen and restore the current key
labels.
KEY
When the terminal is in remote mode, pressing the ES
key sets pending a block transfer of data from display
memory to the host computer (in such a case the key
also locks the keyboard until the resultant data transfer is
complete).
The type of handshaking used and precisely what data gets
transmitted depends on the following factors:
1. Whether the terminal is in character mode, block line
mode, or block page mode.
2. Whether or not the terminal is in format mode.
3. The settings of the InhHndShk(G), Inh DC2(H), and
line/page fields in the terminal configuration menu.
Table 3-1 summarizes the effect of the key in each of
the possible mode/strap combinations.
3-7
Keyboard Control
Table 3-1. Key Operation
CHARACTER MODE
The cursor is repositioned to column 1.
All characters through the first subsequent block ter-
minator or through the end of the line (whichever is
encountered first) are transmitted to the host computer
as a block.
ASCII control codes, video enhancement escape se-
quences, alternate character set escape sequences, and
field definition escape sequences are transmitted if
encountered.
If the operation is terminated by encountering the end
of the line, the terminal sends a ® (or a % tr if auto line
feed mode is enabled). The cursor is repositioned to
column 1 and a line feed is performed if auto line feed
mode is enabled.
If the operation is terminated by encountering a block
terminator, the terminal sends a block terminator fol-
lowed by a % (or a ® tr if auto line feed mode is enabled).
The cursor remains positioned immediately following
the terminator.
If there is no data to be transmitted, the terminal sends
a block terminator followed by a % (or a kr if auto line
feed mode is enabled).
The type of handshaking used is determined as follows:
InhHndShk CG) = YES
Inh DC2CH) = NO — 9,/2 M
Any other combination — no handshake
CHARACTER MODE, FORMAT MODE
If the cursor is within an unprotected field, all charac-
ters from the current cursor position through the end of
the field are transmitted to the host computer as a block.
Otherwise, the terminal searches for the next subse-
quent unprotected field and transmits the content of
that field.
ASCII control codes within the field are transmitted.
Video enhancement escape sequences, alternate charac-
ter set escape sequences, and field definition escape
sequences within the field are NOT transmitted.
If the operation is terminated by encountering the end
of the unprotected field, the terminal sends a% (or ar
if auto line feed mode is enabled). The cursor remains at
the first character position after the end of the field.
If the operation is terminated by encountering a block
terminator, the terminal send} a block terminator fol-
lowed by a% (or a%*r if auto line feed mode is enabled).
The cursor remains positioned immediately following
the terminator.
If there is no data to be transmitted, the terminal sends
a block terminator followed by a% (or a kr if auto line
feed mode is enabled). The % that is transmitted has no
effect on the terminal locally, and the cursor remains
unmoved.
The type of handshaking used is determined as follows:
InhHndShk CG) = YES
Inh DC2(H) = NO —> 9/5 9
Any other combination — no handshake
BLOCK LINE MODE
Block line mode means that Block Mode is on and that
the line/page (D) field in terminal configuration is set
to “line”.
Inh DC2(H) = YES
The cursor is repositioned to one within the current
line. All characters through the first subsequent
block terminator or through the end of the line
(whichever is encountered first) are then transmit-
ted to the host computer as a block.
Inh DC2(H) = NO
The cursor is NOT repositioned. All characters
through the first subsequent block terminator or
through the end of the line (whichever is encoun-
tered first) are transmitted to the host computer as
a block.
ASCII control codes, video enhancement escape se-
quences, alternate character set escape sequences, and
field definition escape sequences are all transmitted if
encountered.
If the operation is terminated by encountering the end
of the line, the terminal sends a % (or a % "r if auto line
feed mode is enabled). The cursor is repositioned to
column 0 and a line feed is performed if auto line feed
mode is enabled.
If the operation is terminated by encountering a block
terminator, the terminal sends a block terminator fol-
lowed by a % (or a rr if auto line feed mode is enabled).
The cursor remains positioned immediately following
the terminator.
3-8
Keyboard Control
Table 3-1. Key Operation (Continued)
If there is no data to transmit, a block terminator fol-
lowed by a % or & 'r is transmitted. The cursor is not
moved.
The type of handshaking used is determined as follows:
InhHndShk(G) is ignored
Inh DC2CH) = NO — ©, /% 2;
Inh DC2(H) = YES — no handshake
BLOCK LINE MODE, FORMAT MODE
Block line mode means that Block Mode is on and the
line/page (D) field in terminal configuration is set
to “line”.
ASCII control codes within the field are transmitted.
Video enhancement escape sequences, alternate charac-
ter set escape sequences, and field definition escape
sequences within the field are NOT transmitted.
If the operation is terminated by encountering the end
of the unprotected field, the terminal sends a® (or a ® tr
if auto line feed mode is enabled). The cursor remains
positioned at the end of the field.
If the operation is terminated by encountering a block
terminator, the terminal sends a block terminator fol-
lowed by a% (or a®%}r if auto line feed mode is enabled).
The cursor remains positioned immediately following
the terminator.
If there is no data to be transmitted, the terminal sends
a block terminator followed by a % (or a kr if auto line
feed mode is enabled). The % that is transmitted has no
effect on the terminal locally, and the cursor remains
unmoved.
The type of handshaking used is determined as follows:
InhHndShkCG) (ignored)
Inh DC2CH) = NO — 9,/4/9,
Inh DC2(H) = YES — no handshake
BLOCK PAGE MODE
Block page mode means that Block Mode is on and the
line/page (D) field in terminal configuration is set
to “line”.
Inh DC2CH) = YES
The cursor is repositioned to the “home up” posi-
tion. All characters through the first subsequent
block terminator or through the end of display
memory (whichever is encountered first) are trans-
mitted to the host computer as a series of blocks,
each block corresponding to one line in dispiay
memory.
Inh DC2CH) = NO
The cursor is NOT repositioned. All characters from
the cursor position through the first subsequent
mi kh. +h A £ Ai Tar
block terminator or through the end of display
memory (whichever is encountered first) are trans-
mitted to the host computer as a series of blocks.
Each block corresponds to one line in display
memory.
ASCII control codes, video enhancement escape se-
quences, alternate character set escape sequences, and
field definition escape sequences are all transmitted if
encountered.
After each line (except the final one) the terminal sends
a%'r. If the operation is terminated by encountering the
end of display memory, the terminal sends a % *r fol-
lowed by a block terminator after the last line. If the
operation is terminated by encountering a block ter-
minator, the terminal sends only a block terminator
after the last line.
If there is no data to be transmitted, the terminal sends
only a block terminator.
The type of handshaking used is determined as follows:
InhHNdShk(G) (ignored)
Inh DC2CH) = NO — ?,/0,/7,
Inh DC2€H) = YES — no handshake
BLOCK PAGE MODE, FORMAT MODE
Inh DC2CH) = YES
The cursor is repositioned to the “home up” posi-
tion. All unprotected characters through the first
subsequent block terminator or through the end of
display memory (whichever is encountered first)
are transmitted to the host computer as a series of
blocks. Each block corresponds to one unprotected
field.
Inh DC2CH) = NO
The cursor is NOT repositioned. All unprotected
characters through the first subsequent block ter-
minator or through the end of display memory
Keyboard Control
Table 3-1. Key Operation (Continued)
(whichever is encountered first) are transmitted to
the host computer as a series of blocks. Each block
corresponds to one unprotected field.
ASCII control codes within the fields are transmitted.
Video enhancement escape sequences, alternate charac-
ter set escape sequences, and field definition escape
sequences within the fields are NOT transmitted.
After each field (except the final one), the terminal
sends a field separator. After the final field, the termi-
nal sends a block terminator.
If the end of display memory is encountered before locat-
ing an unprotected field, the terminal merely sends a
block terminator.
The type of handshaking used is determined as follows:
InhHndShk€G) (ignored)
1 nh DC2CH) = NO — 9/09,
Inh DC2(H) = YES — no handshake
MODIFY MODE
Note that modify line and modify all modes are func-
tional only when the terminal is configured for charac-
ter mode operation. When either block mode or format
mode is enabled, the key operates as described for
block mode earlier in this table.
In modify mode, the cursor is repositioned as follows:
1. To the logical start-of-text pointer; or
2. To the designated start column (Start Col) if there is
no logical start-of-text pointer.
For more information on the logical start-of-text pointer
and start column, refer to Table 2-1, “Terminal Configu-
ration Menu Fields” in section II.
All characters through the first subsequent block ter-
minator or through the end of the line (whichever is
encountered first) are transmitted to the host.computer
as a block.
ASCII control codes, video enhancement escape se-
quences, alternate character set escape sequences, and
field definition escape sequences are all transmitted if
encountered.
If the operation is terminated by encountering the end
of the line, the terminal sends a % (or a % "r if auto line
feed mode is enabled). IfLocalEcho = OFF, the cursor is
repositioned to the column at which the transmission
began, otherwise the cursor is repositioned to Column 1.
A line feed is performed if auto line feed mode is enabled.
If the operation is terminated by encountering a block
terminator, the terminal sends a block terminator fol-
lowed by a % (or a®*+r if auto line feed mode is enabled).
The cursor remains positioned immediately following
the terminator.
The type of handshaking used is determined as follows:
InhHndShk CG) is ignored
Inh DC2€CH) = NO — 9,/4/,
Inh DC2(H) = YES — no handshake
SEND DISPLAY (fd)
From a program executing in a host computer, you can
trigger a block transfer of data from display memory to the
host computer by issuing the following escape sequence:
Ed
This escape sequence is only responded to when received
over a datacomm line; it is ignored if entered through the
keyboard or issued from a user key (unless block mode is
enabied). With the following two exceptions, the resultant
data transfer is performed as though the key had
been pressed:
3-10
1. The cursor is NOT repositioned. The data transfer al-
ways begins at the current cursor position.
2. The type of handshaking used is determined as follows:
InhHndShk CG) = NO — 5, handshake
InhHndShk CG) = YES
Inh DC2CH) = NO — ?,/9,/0,
InhHndShk(G) = YES
Inh DC2(H) = YES — no handshake
The®d sequence also temporarily disables the keyboard so
that the key cannot be used until the current data
- . . -
transfer is completed. If the Cd sequence is received while
an HN key data transfer is in progress, the escape se-
quence is ignored.
Note that an &d sequence resets the “block trigger
received” flag. This means, for example, that if you are
using the % handshake and the terminal receives a? fol-
lowed by the fd, it “forgets” that a block trigger was just
received and thus will NOT send the data immediately. The
terminal must receive another % before it will start the
data transfer.
The amount of data transferred depends on the following
terminal settings: page/ line field in terminal configura-
tion, and whether Block Mode, Modify All, or Line Modify
is enabled. For more detailed information, refer to Table
3-1“ Key Operation” in this section.
ENABLE/DISABLE KEYBOARD
You can enable and disable the terminal’s keyboard by
executing escape sequences. When the keyboard is disabled
all keys EXCEPT the following are ignored:
SEN RESET
The escape sequences for enabling and disabling the
keyboard are as follows:
ENABLE: “b
DISABLE: с
Once disabled, the keyboard remains disabled until ex-
plicitly enabled, until a soft or hard reset is performed, or
until the power is turned off.
SOFT RESET
A soft reset does the following:
1. Rings the terminal’s bell.
2. Halts any device operations currently in progress.
3. Enables the keyboard (if disabled).
UN
. Clears any existing error conditions and removes the
error message display (if present) from the bottom of
the screen.
5. Disables display functions mode (if enabled).
6. Halts any datacomm transfers currently in progress,
clears the datacomm buffers.
7. Resets the integral printer, if present.
8. Turns off record mode, if on.
Keyboard Control
The data on the screen, all terminal operating modes
(except display functions mode), and all active configura-
tion parameters are unchanged.
From the keyboard, you perform a soft reset by pressing the
| key.
From a program executing in a host computer, you perform
a soft reset using the following escape sequence:
tg
HARD RESET
A hard reset has the same effect as turning the terminal’s
power off and then back on except that the power-on self-
test is not performed.
A hard reset does the following:
1. Rings the terminals bell.
2. Halts any device operations currently in progress.
3. Enables the keyboard (if disabled).
4. Clears all of alphanumeric memory.
5
. Clears any existing error conditions and removes the
error message display (if present) from the bottom of the
screen.
6. Halts any datacomm transfers currently in progress,
clears the datacomm buffer, and reinitializes the
datacomm port according to the appropriate power-on
datacomm configuration parameters.
7. Resets the terminal configuration menu parameters to
values saved in non-volatile memory or to their default
power-on values.
8. Resets certain operating modes and parameters as
follows:
Disables display functions mode, caps mode, report
mode, metric mode, data logging, and modify line.
Resets the left margin to column 1.
Resets the right margin to column 80.
Turns off the “insert character” function edit.
Resets the integral printer, if present.
Resets the User Keys to default values.
Resets record mode.
9. Resets certain operating modes in the HP 2623A:
Turns on alphanumeric display.
Turns on graphics display.
“Clears graphics memory.
Turns off graphics cursor.
Enables graphics fucntions of the graphics/numeric
keypad.
From the keyboard, you perform a hard reset by simulta-
neously pressing the E48, and keys.
3-11
Keyboard Control
From a program executing in a host computer, you perform
a hard reset using the following escape sequence:
&E
BREAK
Pressing the key transmits a 200 ms space on the
asynchronous data communications line, or sets the sec-
ondary channel low for 200 ms (depending on whether the
terminal is in transmit or receive state). This serves as a
“break” signal to interrupt computer operation.
BELL
The keyboard includes an embedded speaker for sounding
an audible tone in response to the ASCII Bell (<BELL>)
control code and for alerting the terminal operator when
certain error conditions occur.
From the keyboard, you generate the Bell code by simulta-
neously pressing the and [J keys.
From a program executing in a host computer, you trigger
the bell tone by transmitting an ASCII Bell control code
(decimal 7).
3-12
WAIT
From a user key or from a program executing in a host
computer, you can cause the terminal to pause for approxi-
mately 1 second using the following escape sequence:
ce
Multiple uses of this escape sequence in succession can be
used to obtain virtually any desired time delay.
Note that while an &@ is in effect, the cursor disappears
from the screen, the keyboard is locked, and the passing of
data from the datacomm firmware to display memory is
inhibited.
For example, if you want to sound the bell tone twice in
succession with a two-second delay between tones, you
could do so using the following control sequence:
<BELL > 6 Te <BELL>
MODEM DISCONNECT
You can direct the terminal to “hang up” the modem by
sending an tf . The terminal accomplishes the modem dis-
connect by lowering the TR/CD (Terminal Ready) line for 2
seconds.
SECTION
IV
Display Control
INTRODUCTION
This section discusses the alphanumeric display control of
the terminal. The graphics display control ofthe HP 2623A
is discussed in Section X.
Tha dic я 1 1 1
The display portion of the terminal consists of a display
screen and display memory. The display cursor (a blinking
underscore mark on the screen) indicates where the next
character entered will appear. As you enter characters,
each is displayed at the cursor position, the ASCII code for
the character is recorded at the associated position in dis-
play memory, and the cursor moves to the next character
position on the screen. As the screen becomes full, newly
entered data causes existing lines to be forced off the
screen. Data lines forced off the screen are still maintained
in display memory and can subsequently be moved back
onto the screen.
You can perform the following display control operations
either locally from the keyboard or remotely from a pro-
gram executing in a host computer:
e Move the cursor up, down, left, or right on the screen.
e Move the displayed data up or down in relation to the
current cursor position. When a roll operation forces
data off the top or bottom edge of the screen, additional
data rolls onto the screen at the opposite edge from dis-
play memory.
e Change the content of the screen to the next or previous
“page” of data in display memory. (A page consists of 24
lines.)
e Set or clear a left and right margin.
e Set or clear one or more tab stop positions.
e Move the cursor forward to the next tab stop position or
backward to the preceding tab stop position.
e Enable or disable the inverse video, half bright, under-
line, and blinking, display enhancements.
e Change from one character set to another (Roman or
Line Drawing, if present).
In addition, you can do the following screen edit operations
either locally or remotely:
e Delete all characters from the current cursor position
through the end of display memory.
® Delete the line containing the cursor (subsequent lines
are rolled up).
¢ Change the line containing the cursor to all blanks.
o Turn off screen display except for softkey labels.
e Delete the character at the current cursor position.
e Insert a blank line immediately preceding (above) the
line currently containing the cursor.
e Enable or disable “insert character” mode. When this
editing mode is enabled, succeeding characters entered
through the keyboard or received from the host computer
are inserted to the left of the character at the current
cursor position.
CURSOR CONTROL
The following topics describe how to alter the cursor/data
relationship either manually by using the cursor control
keys or programmatically by using escape sequences.
Home Up
Pressing the key moves the cursor to the left margin
in the top row of the screen and rolls the text in display
memory down as far as possible so that the first line in
display memory appears in the top row of the screen.
When format mode is enabled, the key also rolls the
text down as far as possible but leaves the cursor positioned
at the beginning of the first unprotected field. If no fields
have been defined, the cursor will appear at the first
column of the first row on the screen.
To perform this function programmatically, use the follow-
ing escape sequence:
SH
When memory lock is enabled, the key rolls the text
down as far as possible below the locked area of the screen,
instead of below the top of the screen, and leaves the cursor
positioned at the beginning of the first unlocked row on the
screen. When both format mode and memory lock are ac-
tive simultaneously, the cursor will go to the first unpro-
tected field on the screen (including the locked area), after
rolling all the text down.
If memory lock is on and the cursor is
within the locked area, will cause
the cursor to go down to the first charac-
ter of the first line of text under the
locked area, after rolling the text down.
4-1
Display Control
Home Down
Pressing the and keys moves the cursor to the
left margin in the bottom line of the screen and rolls the
text in display memory up as far as possible so that the last
line in display memory appears immediately above the
cursor position.
To perform this function programmatically, use the follow-
ing escape sequence:
CF
Move Cursor Up
Each time you press the Wl key, the cursor moves up-
ward one row in the current column position. If you hold
the key down, the cursor movement continues row-by-row
until the key is released. When the cursor is in the top row
of the screen, pressing this key moves the cursor to the
same column position in the bottom row of the screen.
To perform this function programmatically, use the follow-
ing escape sequence:
&A
Move Cursor Down
Each time you press the @MB key, the cursor moves
downward one row in the current column position. If you
hoid the key down, the cursor movement continues row-by-
row until the key is released. When the cursor is in the
bottom row of the screen, pressing this key moves the
cursor to the same column position in the top row of the
screen.
To perform this function programmatically, use the follow-
ing escape sequence:
`В
Move Cursor Right
Each time you press the key, the cursor moves one
column to the right in the current screen row. If you hold
the key down, the cursor movement continues column-by-
column until the key is released.
This function is performed without regard for existing mar-
gins. When the cursor reaches the rightmost column of the
screen, pressing this key moves the cursor to the leftmost
column in the next lower row (from the rightmost column
in the bottom row of the screen, the cursor moves to the
leftmost column in the top row of the screen).
To perform this function programmatically, use the follow-
Ing escape sequence:
fC
Move Cursor Left
Each time you press the E key, the cursor moves one
column to the left in the current screen row. If you hold the
key down, the cursor movement continues column-by-
column until the key is released.
This function is performed without regard for existing mar-
gins. When the cursor reaches the leftmost column of the
screen, pressing this key moves the cursor to the rightmost
column in the next higher row (from the leftmost column in
the top row of the screen, the cursor moves to the rightmost
column in the bottom row of the screen).
To perform this function programmatically, use the follow-
ing escape sequence:
&D
Roll Text Up
Each time you press the key, the text in display
memory rolls up one row on the screen. The top row rolls off
the screen, the remaining data rolls up one line on the
screen, and a new line of data rolls from display memory
into the bottom line of the screen. If you hold this key down,
the text continues to roll upward until you release the key
or until the final line of data in display memory appears in
the top row of the screen. In the latter case, pressing or
continuing to hold down the key has no further effect. The
“roll up” function is illustrated in figure 4-1A.
À Г)
MEMORY
DISPLAY
SCREEN
MEMORY
eee)
ROLL UP
B. DD
MEMORY
DISPLAY
SCREEN
| MEMORY
_ DD Y
ROLL DOWN
Figure 4-1. The “Roll” Data Functions
4-2
In the configuration and user softkey definition menus,
this key is disabled. In memory lock mode, the unlocked
text rolls behind the locked text, as if the bottom line of the
locked text is the top of the screen.
To perform this function programmatically, use the follow-
Ing escape sequence:
TS
Roll Text Down
Each time you press the key, the text in display
memory rolls down one row on the screen. The bottom row
rolls off the screen, the remaining data rolls down one line
on the screen, and a new line of data rolls from display
memory into the top line of the screen. If you hold this key
down, the text continues to roll downward until you release
the key or until the first line of data in display memory
appears in the top row of the screen. In the latter case,
pressing or continuing to hold down the key has no further
effect. The “roll down” function is illustrated in figure 4-1B.
In the configuration and user softkey definition menus,
this key is disabled. In memory lock mode, the unlocked
text rolls behind the locked text, as if the bottom line of the
locked text is the top of the screen. The cursor position
relative to the screen remains unchanged after this
operation.
To perform this function programmatically, use the follow-
ing escape sequence:
Display Control
Next Page/Previous Page
The data in display memory can be accessed (displayed on
the screen) in blocks that are known as “pages”. A page
consists of 24 lines of data. The current page is that se-
quence of lines which appears on the screen at any given
time. The previous page is the preceding 24 lines in display
memory. The next page is the succeeding 24 lines in display
memory.
t ”
The concept of display “pages” is illustrated in figure 4-2.
Pressing the key rolls the text in display memory up so
that the next page of data replaces the current page on the
screen. If you hold the key down, the operation is re-
peated so the final line in display memory appears in the
top line of the screen.
In the configuration and user softkey definition menus,
this key is disabled.
To perform the “next page” function programmatically, use
the following escape sequence:
EU
Pressing the EBkey rolls the text in display memory down
so that the previous page of data replaces the current page
on the screen. If you hold the key down, the operation is
repeated so the first line in display memory appears in
the top line of the screen.
In the configuration and user softkey definition menus,
this key is disabled.
To perform the “previous page” function programmatically,
use the following escape sequence:
ET E
LINE 1 LINE 1
Po |
24 DISPLAY 24 ) | PREVIOUS |
LINES SCREEN LINES | PAGE |
| | DISPLAY CONTROL
— DISPLAY MEMORY
48 LINES
| 80 CHARACTERS/LINE
24 | | МЕХТ | 24 DISPLAY
LINES | PAGE | LINES SCREEN
Lo ee ee J
LINE 48 LINE 48
Figure 4-2. Previous Page and Next Page Concepts
Display Control
At the completion of the “next page” or “previous page”
function, the cursor is positioned at the left margin in the
top line of the screen.
If format mode is on, the cursor will go to the first unpro-
tected field on the new page.
MEMORY ADDRESSING SCHEME
Display memory positions can be addressed using absolute
or relative coordinate values. Display memory is made up
of 80 columns (0-79) and 48 lines (0-47). There can be as
many as 48 lines of 80 characters (2 screens). The amount of
memory in the terminal can be determined from byte 0 of
the primary terminal status (refer to Section VII). The
types of addressing available are:
e Absolute
e Screen Relative
e Cursor Relative
ROW ADDRESSING. Figure 4-3 illustrates the way the
three types of addressing affect row or line numbers. The
cursor is shown positioned in the fourth row on the screen.
Screen row 0 is currently at row 6 of display memory. In
order to reposition the cursor to the first line of the screen
the following three destination rows could be used:
a. Absolute: row 6
b. Screen Relative: row 0
c. Cursor Relative: row —3
COLUMN ADDRESSING. Column addressing is ac-
complished in a manner similar to row addressing. There is
no difference between screen and cursor relative column
addressing. Figure 4-4 illustrates the difference between
absolute and relative addressing. The cursor is shown in
column 5.
Whenever the row or column addresses exceed those avail-
able, the largest possible value is substituted. In screen
relative addressing, the cursor cannot be moved to a row
position that is not currently displayed. For example, in
figure 4-3c a relative row address of —10 would cause the
cursor to be positioned at the top of the current screen
(relative row —3). Column positions are limited to the
available screen positions (0 to 79 in figure 4-4a and —5 to
74 in figure 4-4b). The cursor cannot be wrapped around
from column 0 to column 79 by specifying large negative
values for relative column positions.
Cursor Sensing
The current position of the screen cursor can be sensed. The
position returned can be the absolute position in display
memory or the location relative to the current screen posi-
tion. (Absolute and relative addresses are discussed under
Cursor Addressing.)
Absolute Sensing fa
Example: The cursor is at column 20, row 40.
computer: “a
terminal: "aa 020c 040R
Relative Sensing -E*"
Example: The cursor is again at column 20, row 40, but
screen row 0 begins at row 35 of display memory.
computer: *
terminal: “r4m 020c 005Y
Cursor Positioning
The cursor can be positioned directly by giving memory or
screen coordinates, or by sending the escape codes for any of
the keyboard cursor positioning operations.
о
1
2
3
4
5
6 о
8 1
2
9 3
> | 3 в
11 5
do
a.) Absolute: row 6
b.) Screen Relative: row O
*
c.) Cursor Relative: row -3
Figure 4-3. Row Addressing
O0 12 3456789 ...79
al
T
1
I
|
a.) Absolute
-5 4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 . . . +74
un — — — -
b.) Relative
Figure 4-4. Column Addressing
Screen Relative Addressing
To move the cursor to any character position on the screen,
use any of the following escape sequences:
EF ta <column number? c <row number> Y
4a <row number> y <column number> C
E& ga <column number> C
Eta <rownumber> У
where:
<column number> is a decimal number specifying the screen
column to which you wish to move the
cursor. Zero specifies the leftmost column.
is a decimal number specifying the screen
row (0-23) to which you wish to move the
cursor. Zero specifies the top row of the
screen; 23 specifies the bottom row.
<row number >
When using the above escape sequences, the data on the
screen always remains unchanged.
If you specify only a <column number>, the cursor remains
in the current row. Similarly, if you specify only a <row
number, the cursor remains in the current column.
Example: The following escape sequence moves the cursor
to the 20th column of the 7th row on the screen:
5 &a 6y 19C
Display Control
Absolute Addressing
You can specify the location of any character within display
memory by supplying absolute row and column coor-
dinates. (Note that this function is disabled when memory
lock mode is on.) To move the cursor to another character
position using absolute addressing, use any of the following
escape sequences:
E& ¿a <column number? ¢ <row number>R
E ga <row number> r <column number > С
E 4a <column number > С
tán <row number > R
where:
<column number> is a decimal number (0-79) specifying the
column coordinate (within display
memory) of the character at which you
want the cursor positioned. Zero specifies
the first (leftmost) column in display
memory, 79 the rightmost column.
is a decimal number (0-47) specifying the
row coordinate (within display memory) of
the character at which you want the cursor
positioned. Zero specifies the first (top)
row in display memory, 47 specifies the
last.
<row number >
When using the above escape sequences, the data visible on
the screen will (if necessary) be rolled up or down in order to
position the cursor at the specified data character. The
cursor and data movement will occur as follows:
e If a specified character position lies within the bound-
~ aries of the screen, the cursor moves to that position and
the data on the screen remains unchanged.
o If the absolute row coordinate is less than that of the top
line currently visible on the screen, the cursor moves to
the specified column in the top row of the screen and the
text rolls downward until the specified row appears in
the top line of the screen.
o Ifthe absolute row coordinate exceeds that of the bottom
line currently visible on the screen, the cursor moves
to the specified column in the bottom row of the screen
and the text rolls upward until the specified row appears
in the bottom line of the screen.
If you specify only a <column number >, the cursor remains
in the current row. Similarly, if you specify only a <row
number >, the cursor remains in the current column.
Example: The following escape sequence moves the cursor
(and rolls the text if neccessary) so that it is
positioned at the character residing in the 60th
column of the 27th row in display memory:
‘ва 26r 59C
4-5
Display Control
Cursor Relative Addressing
You can specify the location of any character within display
memory by supplying row and column coordinates that are
relative to the current cursor position. (Note that this
function is disabled when memory lock mode is on.) To
move the cursor to another character position using cursor
relative addressing, use any of the following escape se-
quences:
E ga +/- <column number > c +/- <row number> R
E ta +/- <row number> r +/- <column number> C
E 4a +/- <column number> C
E La +/- <row number> R
where:
is a decimal number specifying the relative
column to which you wish to move the
cursor. A positive number specifies how
many columns to the right you wish to
move the cursor; a negative number
specifies how many columns to the left.
<column number>
is a decimal number specifying the relative
row to which you wish to move the cursor. A
positive number specifies how many rows
down you wish to move the cursor; a nega-
tive number specifies how many rows
upward.
<row number >
When using the preceding escape sequences, the data will
(if necessary) be rolled up or down in order to position the
cursor at the specified data character. The cursor and data
movement will occur as follows:
e If a specified character position lies within the bound-
aries of the screen, the cursor moves to that position and
the data on the screen remains unchanged.
o If the specified cursor relative row precedes the top line
currently visible on the screen, the cursor moves to the
specified column in the top row of the screen and the text
rolls downward until the specified row appears in the top
line of the screen.
e If the specified cursor relative row follows the bottom
line currently visible on the screen, the cursor moves to
the specified column in the bottom row of the screen
and the text rolls upward until the specified row appears
in the bottom line of the screen.
If you specify only a <column number> the cursor remains
in the current row. Similarly, if you specify only a <row
number> the cursor remains in the current column.
Example: The following escape sequence moves the cursor
(and rolls the text if necessary) so that it is
positioned at the character residing 15 columns
to the right and 25 rows above the current cur-
sor position within display memory:
Er&a +15c -25R
4-6
Combining Absolute
And Relative Addressing
You may use a combination of screen relative, absolute and
cursor relative addressing within a single escape sequence.
Example: Move the cursor (and roll the text if necessary)
so that it is positioned at the character residing
in the 70th column of the 18th row below the
current cursor position.
Er&a 69c +18R
Example: Move the cursor so that it is positioned at the
character residing 15 columns to the left of the
current cursor position in the 4th row currently
visible on the screen.
E ha -15c 3Y
Example: Move the cursor (and roll the text up or down if
necessary) so that it is positioned at the charac-
ter residing in the 10th column of absolute row
48 in display memory.
faa 9c 47R
EDIT OPERATIONS
You can edit data displayed on the screen by simply over-
striking the old data. In addition, the terminal provides the
following edit functions which can be enabled and disabled
either manually by using the edit control keys or program-
matically by using escape sequences:
e Insert Line.
® Delete Line.
* Insert Character.
* Delete Character.
e Clear Display.
e Clear Line.
Insert Line
When you use the insert line edit function, the text line
containing the cursor and all text lines below it roll
downward one line, a blank line is inserted in the screen
row containing the cursor, and the cursor moves to the left
margin of the blank line. Note that when memory lock
mode is active, inserting a line within the locked area of the
screen does not change the size of the locked area.
From the keyboard, each time you press the key the
terminal inserts one blank line. If you hold the key down,
the terminal continues to insert blank lines until the key is
released.
This edit function is disabled in format mode, and is dis-
abled in the configuration and user softkeys definition
menus,
NOTE
When display memory (48 rows) is full,
inserting a line will cause data to be lost.
The first line in display memory will al-
ways be the one to be released unless it
happens to be on the screen, in which case
the last line in display memory will be
released.
From a program executing in a host computer, you insert a
blank line at the current cursor position using the follow-
ing escape sequence:
EL
Delete Line
When you use the delete line edit function, the text line
containing the cursor is deleted from display memory, all
text lines below it roll upward one row, and the cursor
moves to the left margin. Note that when memory lock
mode is active, deleting a line within the locked area does
not change the size of the locked area.
From the keyboard, each time you press the key the
terminal deletes one line of text. If you hold the key down,
the terminal continues to delete text lines until the key is
released or until there are no subsequent text lines remain-
ing in display memory. In the latter case, pressing or con-
tinuing to hold down this key has no further effect.
This edit function is disabled in format mode, and is
disabled in the configuration and user softkeys definition
menus.
From a program executing in a host computer, you delete
the text line at the current cursor position using the follow-
ing escape sequence:
EM
Insert Character
When the insert character editing function is enabled,
characters entered through the keyboard or received from
the host computer are inserted into display memory at the
Display Control
This edit function is meant to be used within that portion of
the screen delineated by the left and right margins. If you
position the cursor to the left of the left margin, the insert
character function works as described above. If you posi-
tion the cursor beyond the right margin, however, the in-
sert character function affects those characters between
the current cursor position and the right boundary of the
screen. In such a case, when the cursor reaches the right
boundary of the screen, it moves to the left margin in the
next lower line and the insert character function continues
from that point as described in the first paragraph above.
The movement of existing characters during an “insert
character” editing operation is illustrated in figure 4-5.
When format mode is off, any unprotected, alternate char-
acter set, and/or video enhancement fields to the right of
the cursor move to the right with the displayable charac-
ters. If the cursor is positioned within any such field the
insert character function extends the range of the field by
one position for each character inserted. Block terminators
at or to the right of the cursor position move to the right
along with the displayable characters.
When format mode is on and the cursor is positioned within
an unprotected field, the insert character function affects
only those characters from the cursor position through the
end of the current subfield. Block terminators are treated
the same as when format mode is off. If the cursor is not
within an unprotected field, it automatically moves to the
first character position of the next subsequent unprotected
field when the first character is inserted.
In the user softkeys definition menu, insert character acts
the same as in format mode; insert character is disabled in
a configuration menu.
cursor position. Each time a character is inserted, the
cursor and all characters from the current cursor position
through the right margin move one column to the right.
Characters that are forced over the right margin are lost.
When the cursor reaches the right margin, it moves to the
left margin in the next lower line and the insert character
function continues from that point.
LEFT RIGHT
MARGIN MARGIN
J
) | T
L
ve
TU
| = CURSOR
— № = CHARACTER
MOVEMENT
Figure 4-5. Character Insert with Margins
Display Control
From the keyboard, you enable and disable the insert char-
acter editing function using the key. When enabled,
the characters “IC” are displayed in the status line at the
bottom of the screen.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable the insert character editing function using the
following escape sequences:
ENABLE: %a
DISABLE: К
Delete Character
When you use the delete character edit function, the cursor
remains stationary, the character at the cursor position is
deleted, all characters between the cursor and the right
margin move left one column, and a blank moves into the
line from the right margin.
This edit function is meant to be used within that portion of
the screen delineated by the left and right margins. If you
position the cursor to the left of the left margin, the delete
character function works as described above. If you posi-
tion the cursor beyond the right margin, however, the
delete character function affects those characters
from the current cursor position through the right bound-
ary of the screen.
The movement of existing characters during a “delete char-
acter” editing operation is illustrated in figure 4-6.
LEFT RIGHT
MARGIN MARGIN
— >
<
DU
<
Ie
\ р
BH =CURSOR
«— = CHARACTER MOVEMENT
Figure 4-6. Character Delete with Margins
4-8
When format mode is off, any unprotected, alternate
character set, and/or video enhancement fields to the right
of the cursor move to the left with the displayable charac-
ters. If the cursor is positioned within any such field, the
delete character function shortens the range of the field by
one position for each character deleted. Deleting the first
character position of an unprotected field changes the rest
of the field to protected. Deleting characters at the start of,
or within, a video enhancement and/or alternate character
set field does NOT alter the characteristics of the rest of the
field. Block terminators to the right of the cursor move to
the left along with the displayable characters and are
deleted if they are at the cursor position when this function
is executed.
When format mode is on and the cursor is positioned within
an unprotected field, this function affects only those
characters from the cursor position through the end of the
current subfield. If the subfield definition also includes a
video enhancement and/or an alternate character set,
those characteristics are NOT altered by the delete charac-
ter function. Block terminators are treated the same as
when format mode is off. If the cursor is not within a
protected field, the delete character function has no effect.
In the user softkeys definition menu, delete character
acts the same as in format mode; delete character is dis-
abled in a configuration menu.
From the keyboard, each time you press the MEN key the
terminal deletes one character. If you hold the key down,
the terminal continues to delete characters until either the
key is released or there are no non-blank characters be-
tween the cursor position and the right margin. In the
latter case, pressing or continuing to hold down this key
has no further effect.
From a program executing in a host computer, you delete
the character at the current cursor position using the
following escape sequence:
&P
Clear Display
When format mode is off, pressing the key deletes all
displaying and non-displaying characters from the current
cursor position through the end of display memory.
When format mode is on, pressing the key deletes all
unprotected displaying and non-displaying characters, all
unprotected video enhancements, and any unprotected line
drawing characters from the current cursor position
through the end of display memory.
This key is disabled in the user softkeys definition and
configuration menus.
To perform this function programmatically, use the follow-
ing escape sequence:
J
Clear Line
When format mode is off, pressing the @ key deletes all
displaying and non-displaying characters from the current
cursor position through the end of the current line.
When format mode is on and the curser is positioned within
an unprotected field, pressing the key deletes all dis-
playing and non-displaying characters and all unprotected
video enhancements from the current cursor position
through the end of the current field. If the cursor is not
within an unprotected field, the key has no effect.
In the user softkeys definition menu, clear line acts the
same as in format mode; clear line is disabled in a configu-
ration menu.
To perform this function programmatically, use the follow-
ing escape sequence:
&K
SETTING AND CLEARING MARGINS
You can redefine the left and/or right margin. These
margins affect the cursor positioning for certain functions
(such as carriage return, home up, home down, etc.) and
establish operational bounds for the insert character and
delete character functions. In addition, the left margin is
always an implicit tab stop. Data to the left of the left
margin or to the right of the right margin is still accessible.
Data transfers from display memory to a host computer or
to a printer are performed without regard to margins.
Format mode, when enabled, clears the margins, creating
an 80 character line (1-80).
When you are entering data through the keyboard and the
cursor reaches the right margin, it automatically moves to
the left margin in the next lower line (note that this operat-
ing characteristic can be disabled through the use of the
“InhEolWrp” terminal configuration parameter; refer to
Section ID. When you press (3, the cursor moves to the
left margin in the current line if auto line feed mode is
disabled or to the left margin in the next lower line if auto
line feed mode is enabled.
When data is being received from a host computer, it enters
display memory only within the defined margins. When
the cursor reaches the right margin, it automatically
moves to the left margin in the next lower line (as men-
tioned above, this operating characteristic can be disabled
through the use of the “InhEolWrp” configuration parame-
ter). When an ASCII % control code is received, the cursor
always moves to the left margin in the current line regard-
less of whether or not auto line feed mode is enabled.
From the keyboard, you set and clear the margins using the
margins/tab/col set of function keys. To get to that set,
use the following keystroke sequence:
(tel
dar gins
tab col
[AIDS]
Display Control
This changes the function key labels to the following:
[£1] [+2] [+31 [+4]
START SET CLEHR CLR AL
COLUMN TAB TAB LEI
[+5] [+6] [FA] [#6]
LEFT. M RIGHT MCR. ALL
MARGIN MARGIN MMARGI NS
To set the left or right margin, move the cursor to the
desired column and then press the appropriate function
key ( or EN). To reset the left margin to column 1
and the right margin to column 80, press ME.
If you attempt to set either margin incorrectly with rela-
tion to the other (e.g., the right margin to the left of the left
margin), the terminal rejects it with an audible “beep”.
From a program executing in a host computer, you set and
clear the margins using the following escape sequences:
SET LEFT MARGIN: “4
SET RIGHT MARGIN: 5
CLEAR ALL MARGINS: &9
The first two escape sequences set the left and right margin
(respectively) at the current cursor position. Before using
them, therefore, you will first have to position the cursor at
the desired column using one of the cursor control escape
sequences described earlier in this section.
SETTING AND CLEARING TABS
You can define a series of tab stops to which you can move
the cursor using the tab and back tab functions (described
as separate topics later in this section).
From the keyboard, you set and clear tab stops using the
margins/tab/col set of function keys. To get to that set,
use the following keystroke sequence:
[+2]
mar gins
tabs /col
[AIDS]
This changes the function key labels to the following:
[+1] [+2] [+3] [+4]
START SET CLEAR oH
COLUMN TAB TAB TABS
[TE] [#7] [+5]
[+5]
LEFT RIGHT CLR AL
MARGIN A AS
To set a tab stop, move the cursor to the desired column and
then press MEM. To clear a tab stop, move the cursor to the
particular tab stop position and then press MEN. To clear
all existing tab stops, press MIN. Note that the left margin
is always an implicit tab stop and is not affected by
ETA.
4-9
Display Control
Tab stops that do NOT lie within the area bounded by the
left and right margins are ignored when the tab or back tab
functions are performed.
From a program executing in a host computer, you set and
clear tab stops using the following escape sequences:
SET TAB: “1
CLEARTAB: “2
CLEAR ALLTABS: 3
The first two escape sequences set and clear (respectively) a
tab stop at the current cursor position. Before using them,
therefore, you will first have to position the cursor at the
desired column using one of the cursor control escape se-
quences described earlier in this section.
TAB
From the keyboard, you can move the cursor ahead to the
next subsequent tab stop using the key (or the
key in the numeric pad). In format mode, tab moves the
cursor to the beginning of the next unprotected field. The
last field wraps around the beginning of the first field.
Tab acts similarly in the user softkeys definition menu
and the configuration menu.
From a program executing in a host computer, you can
move the cursor ahead to the next tab stop issuing either an
ASCII *% control code (decimal 9; Control “I”) or the follow-
Ing escape sequence:
FI
Tab stops that do NOT lie within the area bounded by the
left and right margins are ignored by the tab function.
Note that the left margin is treated as a tab stop. When the
cursor is positioned at or to the right of the rightmost tab
stop, the tab function moves the cursor to the left margin in
the next lower line. When the cursor is positioned to the left
of the left margin, however, the tab function advances the
cursor to the first explicit tab stop in the line (or to the left
margin in the next lower line if no explicit tab stops are
defined). Note that tabbing the cursor to the next line is the
equivalent of a linefeed.
BACK TAB
From the keyboard you can move the cursor backward to
the previous tab stop using the EZ and keys (or
the key in the numeric pad).
In format mode, configuration menus, and user keys defini-
tion menu, the cursor, if within a field, will move to the
beginning of the field; otherwise it will move to the first
character of the previous unprotected field.
From a program executing in a host computer you can
move the cursor backward to the previous tab stop using
the following escape sequence:
Fi
4-10
Tab stops that do NOT lie within the area bounded by the
left and right margins are ignored by the back tab function.
Note that the left margin is treated as a tab stop. When the
cursor is positioned at or to the left of the left margin, the
back tab function moves the cursor to the rightmost tab
stop in the next higher line.
Performing a back tab with the cursor on the left margin of
the first row on the screen (or the first unlocked row if
memory lock mode is active) is equivalent to performing a
roll down.
SCREEN BLANKING
From a program executing in a host computer you can turn
off and on the alphanumeric display video, excluding the
softkey labels. This feature may be used to turn off the
display video while a form is being drawn into alphanu-
meric memory. After the form is completed, the video may
be turned on. The escape seguences follow:
Turn off display video: &w13F
Turn on display video: “caw12F
DISPLAY ENHANCEMENTS
The terminal includes as a standard feature the following
display enhancement capabilities:
¢ Inverse Video-—black characters are displayed against a
white background.
® Underline Video—characters are underscored.
e Blink Video-—characters blink on and off.
o Half Bright—characters (or background for inverse
video) are displayed at half intensity.
You use these enhancements on a field basis. They may be
used separately or in any combination. When used, they
cause control bits to be set within display memory. If the
content of display memory is subsequently transmitted in
block mode to a host computer, these control bits are trans-
lated into escape sequences which are transmitted along
with the displayable text characters.
From a program executing in a host computer, or from the
keyboard, you enable and disable the various video en-
hancements by embedding escape sequences within the
data.The general form of the escape sequence is as follows:
E td <enhancement code>
where enhancement code is one of the uppercase letters À
through 0 specifying the desired enhancement(s) or an ® to
specify end of enhancement as follows:
Display Control
Enhancement Character
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
Half-Bright X x x x x x x x
Underline X X X X X X X X
Inverse Video X X X X X x X X
Blinking X X X X X X X X
End Enhancement X
Note that the escape sequence for “end enhancement” (c&d 1 1
8) or the escape sequence for another video enhancement, 0 G
will end the previous enhancement. ‘ y
ТИ |
Example: Define columns 10 through 14 of line 5 to be
inverse video and blinking.
Step 1. Position the cursor at column 10 in line 5.
Step 2. Enter t4dC.
Step 3. Move the cursor to column 15 in line 5.
Step 4. Enter t4d ® (this ends the enhancements). The
field should be white.
Step 5. Enter the word TERMINAL beginning in column 9
of line 5. It should appear as shown below. The
characters “ERMIN” should be in inverse video
You may want to enter some frequently used enhancements
into the user keys for ease in entering the enhancements
onto the display.
Example: Enter Underline, Half-bright Inverse, Inverse,
and End Enhancement escape sequences into
the Jl} through I user keys (figure 4-7).
Step 1. Press
Step 2. Press “NEXT CHOICE” until “L” is displayed in
to display the menu.
and blinking. the attribute field of f1 for local operation.
KEY LABEL
DEFINITION ATTRIBUTE FIELDS
FIELD FIELD |
VA / N
+1 LABEL UNDER ES
Ted
#2 LABEL HALF -BRUBINYERSE
& &d. a ;
+3 a LABEL [ЖЗ UNDER
E&dL
#4 LABEL E NHANCE
Teo
FS No LABEL I
&t
+6 Ц
& Li
#7 +
бы
FE T
Eu
| НЕ! НИТ
NE XT PRE VIOUS
CHOICE CHOTCE VAL UE 5H
IIA ENN EEE
DISPLAY
NDS
E
EA
1
Figure 4-7. Menu After Entering Four Enhancement Escape Sequences
4-11
Display Control
Step 3. Press to position the cursor to the label
field; then, type a meaningful label to represent
the enhancement (e.g., “UNDER” in the first label
and “LINE” in the second label field).
Step 4. Press to position the cursor to the defini-
tion field; then, press the “DISPLAY FUNCTIONS”
key. Now, enter the escape sequence for the en-
hancement; then, turn off display functions.
(Display functions is turned on to enter the “€”,
escape, character.)
Step 5. Tab to the next key fields, and enter the appropri-
ate data in a manner described above.
Step 6. When you have finished entering the data into the
menu, press to return to the normal display
with the user key labels.
Step 7. You many now turn on any enhancement specified
in the user keys by positioning the cursor to where
you want the enhancement to begin; then, press
the appropriate user key. To turn off the enhance-
ment, press the user key containing the end en-
hancement escape sequence.
DESIGNING AND USING FORMS
With the terminal, you can design elaborate data entry
forms constructed of varying line types from the optional
line drawing set and containing alphanumeric annota-
tions and protected and unprotected fields.
When format mode is enabled, the cursor automatically
moves to the start of the first unprotected field in the form.
Henceforth, the terminal operator can only enter data into
those portions of the display screen which lie within unpro-
tected fields, the remainder of the screen is protected.
When the operator enters a character into the last position
of a field, the cursor advances to the start of the next
unprotected field. In addition, the and
keys can be used to move the cursor to the start of the
preceding or next unprotected field. If the cursor is
within a protected field, it automatically advances to the
start of the next unprotected field when the operator
attempts to type a data character.
You enable and disable format mode programmatically by
using the following escape sequences:
ENABLE: “tu
DISABLE: ‘x
These sequences may be entered through the keyboard,
executed from within a user key definition, or issued from a
program in a host computer.
There are three major steps to creating data entry forms:
1. Create the linear structure of the form on the screen
using the optional line drawing set.
2. Define the various unprotected fields within the form.
4-12
3. Programmatically read the completed form and store it
in the host computer for future use.
DRAWING FORMS
In order to draw lines with your terminal, you need option
202 of the HP 2622A or HP 2623A terminal. Option 202 is
equipped with two character sets: the standard USASCII
character set and the Line Drawing character set.
With the terminal configured to its default state (i.e., set for
7-bit ASCII-Ascii 8-bit is NO in the terminal configuration
menu), the standard USASCII set is defined as the Base
set, and the Line Drawing set is defined as the alternate
character set. The elements of the Line Drawing set and
their relationship to the terminal’s standard USASCII
keyboard are illustrated in figure 4-7.
Note that the relationship of some line drawing set ele-
ments to the keys varies if the terminal is configured to
another national character set. (Refer to the Terminal Con-
figuration Menu discussed in Section II for the terminal’s
present configuration.) Appendix B provides a description
of the national keyboard options and a code chart which
cross-references the keyboard character to the line draw-
ing set character.
The first step in generating a data entry form is to create
the linear structure of the form on the screen along with
any constant alphanumeric annotations such as the form’s
title and the row/column headings. You do this using the
Line Drawing and standard USASCII character sets.
When you are designing a form through the keyboard, you
use ASCII % (control-N) and 5; (control-O) codes to switch
back and forth between the Line Drawing and USASCII
character sets.
You switch from the Base set (USASCII) to the Line Draw-
ing set by issuing an ASCII % code (control-N) and you
switch from the Line Drawing set back to the Base set by
issuing an ASCII 5, code (control-O). Note that the % code
affects only those characters from the current cursor posi-
tion through the next % or “ code or through the end of the
line, whichever occurs first. Consequently, if the Line
Drawing set is enabled at the end of one line on the screen
and you also want it enabled at the start of the next line,
you will have to explicitly issue another $ code at the start
of the second line.
Figure 4-8 illustrates a sample form and identifies the
keystrokes used for generating the various different types
of line segments. Figure 4-9 shows the same form as it
actually appears on the terminal's screen. Figure 4-10
shows the Base set equivalent characters for the entire
form structure.
One approach to generating a form structure through the
keyboard is to load two of the user keys with the $ and %
codes (control-N and control-0, respectively, with display
functions mode enabled), define both as Local keys, define
Display Control
Figure 4-7. Line Drawing Set Elements
their Labels as “Line Draw” and “Base Set”, respectively,
and enable them by pressing E. Then draw the form
structure and alphanumeric annotations using the Base
set asillustrated in figure 4-10. As the form is evolving, use
the cursor control keys and the two user keys to switch the
linear structure portions of the form to the Line Drawing
character set. When doing this, however, be sure that those
portions of the form that will be used for data fields are set
to the Base set (figure 4-11 shows three lines of the sample
form and the various points at which you would use the %
and 5 codes). You may also, if you wish, load some of the
more repetitive line definitions (such as the second and
third lines in figure 4-11) into user keys to speed up the
drawing of the main body of the form.
Video enhancements can be incorporated into the form
using the user keys. Define the keys as “local”, the labels as
“half-brt/inverse”, “full-brt/inverse”, “under /
line”, “enhance/off”, etc. The escape sequences are given
previously in this section under “DISPLAY ENHANCE-
MENTS”. To begin an enhancement, position the cursor on
the screen; then, press the user key containing the desired
enhancement. Next, to end the enhancement, position the
cursor to where you want the enhancement to end (must be
in the same line); then, press the key containing the escape
sequence for ending the enhancement.
A program running in the host computer can also be used to
draw forms on the terminal display screen.
\
\
\ | FARRICATED STOCK DRÁN.ING ASSIGNTMENT
\
NY
N
] ` и
STOCK NO R& DDATES “EG PEZ
a SPECS \
~ DRAWING PART NAME DRAVING TITLE REMARKS
XXX |Y Y Y Y Y NUMBER А | В! со
— Ja
OC
Figure 4-8. Sample Data Entry Form
4-13
Display Control
FRERICSATED STOCK DFAMIMG ASSI GHMERT
T 1
STOCkE HO, SPECS. FED DHTES МР С, ESPEC
DREAMT HG FRET HAME DREAMIN: TITLE FEMBRES
YY PHUMEE E: | HEC I
ma
1 |
Figure 4-9. Completed Data Entry Form
AS O RR II LE titra
FREFICHTED STOCH DRAWING ASST GHMEN]
EEE E EEE EEE EE ERE EE EEES
STOCK HO, :SFECS. 1 a + RID OATES | MPG, SPEC:
aa Tao," OFANING: FART NAME DEANINS TITLE 1, ou. . 5... 0 FEMARES Ру, ТТТ,"
RARA. UU TO HUMBER + ; ! ! : H.E.C.0
O AA RAA A A
| i I и
| ' H
за » : : ? * » #1 A RN EJ > 5» #s : 2 ! + + 4 * п пач 4 + « “0 «+ + « 1 +4 4 1 4 Ы vor
: I 1
| == ‚ i
ns PO ANN NON LA паза! nos 5 1" rx. «#1 #1 #0" s 4 , 15 95 5 EE 1 ’ * ' no A \ :
. J 1 | :
i +
1 # 3 + + 9 в «+ + #4 4 # 4 à 5 1 8 1 5 1 # FB 9 + #4 4 1 4 8 à 9 8 8 E AN "я a v 5 A "moon mom а я 1 "a + яя E + LE |
! : ! } ;
| a = M
за 5 » # »» чаво so 39 8 8 + NOA AN NANO a 9 1 4 A Na E NON NO У a NOAA ECN Por Tes , ' Yo
. ! : 1 ! .
! # a т 1
+ " y ¥ 3 3 1° "* 4% 8&8 #4 3 NON OB POP ARA AA AAA AAA AA яж чая 4 XX A NE 4 + я 4 + # + #4 « # RH "a3 X y 34
. 1 i i
| 5 Fr
a + 2 пля #5 #15") SOON NN SA заза ая тия ааа): 8 + x: , я "я
: 1 4
TYR sr rs Tr rss TE RRs YT EE dhs fy ss TTR Ry яч ry yyy sorry TT NT ye
: ; ; } A
1999: 9993099995999 YAA YY AS AYNA. 9:9997
Figure 4-10. Base Set Equivalents for Data Entry Form Illustrated in Figure 4-9.
4-14
Display Control
| | 1 Ц 1 di 1 PL 1 | 1
— 1 I i 1 " Hi
=
0
ШО Ш ШО 1. Шо!
DI Ol OI UI ОТ OI OI DI OIDIQI
| | 1 il i | | | i
1 E IT 1 EI || 1 | | | 1
=
г
S = HSCII “SOF code 5 = ASCII Sl code
Cl I
Figure 4-11. Use of Shift-In and Shift-Out Codes
The program must first define the line drawing character
set as the alternate character set by sending an t)B to the
terminal.
The program then must go through the same process of
shifting out of the base character set (% = control-N =
decimal 14) to draw the linear portions of the form, and
shift back into the base character set (5 = control-O =
decimal 15) to structure the alphanumeric portions of the
form.
FORMS MODE (FORMAT MODE)
In Forms Mode, the terminal prevents you from over-
writing or transmitting data in protected fields. Forms
Mode is normally entered under control of the computer.
Forms Mode is turned on by sending %W (the cursor is
homed to the beginning of the first unprotected field).
Normal operation is returned with TX (the cursor remains
in its present position).
Protected Fields
Fields can be protected so that displayed data cannot be
overwritten or sent to a computer. When the terminal is
placed in “Forms Mode” (Format Mode) all character
positions on the screen are protected except those fields
that have been specifically defined as “unprotected”.
Unprotected Fields
Data can be written into unprotected fields in the normal
manner. After reaching the end of an unprotected field, the
cursor moves to the beginning of the next unprotected field.
The tab functions can be used to move from one unprotected
field to the beginning of the next unprotected field. “ci
causes the cursor to be positioned at the beginning of the
previous unprotected field. Fields are defined as “un-
protected” by using &[ at the start of the field. &1 or the
end of the line is used to end the field.
In the following figure, only the fields shown in white are
unprotected. Even if the operator moves the cursor to a
protected field and types a character, the cursor will move
to the nearest unprotected field before displaying the
character.
FORM #1876R
PACIFIC TOOL INC 1273 CRECENT WAY SAN JOSE CALIFORNIA 95131
07 16 1976 38 FINISHED STEEL CASTINGS 874738 65.
03 19 1976 749 TAPE TRANSPORT BACKPLATES 875483
02 28 1976 13 MILLED FLANGE ASSEMBLY 748563 877.
19
19
H.C. DOUGLAS
NOTE
Although the terminal does not support
“transmit only” fields, if the “transmit
only” escape sequence (€ 1) is sent from
the computer, it is redefined as an unpro-
tected field.
4-15/4-16
SECTION
V
Printer Control
INTRODUCTION
The HP 2623A Graphics Terminal includes an
asynchronous RS-232C port for connecting the terminal to
an external printer. As an option, either the HP 2622A or
the HP 2623A terminal may also include an integral
printer.
With either or both printers present, you may do any of the
following:
e Initiate and terminate print operations programatically
from a host computer.
e Print the line containing the cursor.
e Print all lines from the one containing the cursor
through the bottom line on the screen.
e Print all lines from the one containing the cursor
through the end of display memory .
e Copy a configuration menu from the screen to either or
both printers.
e Enable data logging (to occur either from the top or
bottom of display memory, as designated by you when
you enable it).
e Perform a line feed (advance the paper one line).
* Perform a form feed.
e Printthe contents of graphics memory on the HP 2623A.
With the optional integral printer, you may also do any of
the following:
e Select expanded, compressed, or normal-sized print
characters.
e Select continuous forms mode, report format (60 text
lines per page), or metric format (64 text lines per page).
All of the above printer control functions can be initiated
either locally by operator keystrokes or remotely by escape
sequences sent from a host computer.
SELECTING INTEGRAL PRINTER MODES
At power-on time or after a hard reset, the integral printer
is automatically reset to print in continuous forms mode
using normal-size characters (80 characters per line, 10
characters to the inch).
To enable or disable the various printer modes (expanded
characters, compressed characters, report format, metric
format, or data logging), you must get to the “device modes”
set of system function keys. One way of doing so is the
following keystroke sequence:
[+11 [+11
ME device device
[RITZ] FONE modes
This changes the function key labels to the following:
[+1] [+2] [#3] [+4]
device RECORD LOG LOG
control MODE BOTTOM TOP
[75] [+6] [fr] [+6]
EXPAND @COMPRESSE REPORT METRIC
PRINT PRINT PRINT PRINT
The use of MAN - RE “device modes” keys are described
in the next few topics below.
To copy graphics data from graphics memory to the inte-
gral printer, you may either initiate the transfer from the
graphics keypad or by an escape sequence. ( tog-
gles the function of the graphics/numeric pad.) Pressing
the [GRAPH COPY] key on the graphics/numeric pad in-
itiates the transfer. Copying graphics data under program
control (using the T&p sequence) is discussed later.
Record Mode
Record Mode copies data from the display or datacomm to
the selected “to” device(s), depending upon whether or not
the terminal is in Remote Mode.
e If in local mode (not Remote), the contents of display
memory (alphanumeric display memory in the HP
2623A) 1s copied to the selected “to” device.
e Ifin Remote Mode, the data stream on the datacomm line
is sent directly to the selected “to” device.
Record Mode may be initiated from either the keyboard or
from an 4p escape sequence. To initiate record mode from
the keyboard, press
AIDS],
device
, RECORD
— onc хй
An asterisk will appear in the softkey label to indicate that
record mode is enabled. While in record mode, the keyboard
is disabled except for the IES, USB, and “RECORD MODE”
keys. Pressing UB, or , ED. EX, or “RECORD MODE”
softkey will terminate record mode.
| 4.034617 0 | ge
5-1
Printer Control
To initiate record mode from an excape sequence, send:
Turn on Record Mode: “rap <NUM>p 20C
(<NUM>p is optional)
The optional <NUM> parameter defines the character which
may be used to turn off record mode. <NUM> is the decimal
equivalent of an ASCII character that will turn off record
mode if it is the first character in a record. The default is
“0”. If “<NUM>p” is omitted, or if “Op” is specified, no char-
acter will terminate record mode. Termination can only
occur by pressing the “RECORD MODE” softkey, pressing
or g (a soft reset), or pressing or TE (a
hard reset).
The termination character is valid only for the current
activation of record mode (i.e., when record mode is ter-
minated, the termination character returns to “0”, the
default character).
The terminal returns an “S”, “F”, or “U” to the host com-
puter if the escape sequence is received from datacomm. An
“S” means that the terminal executed the escape sequence
successfully; an “F” means that the terminal failed to exe-
cute the escape sequence; a "U” means that you terminated
execution. This could be done by pressing the “REMOTE
MODE” softkey on the keyboard.
When the status character is sent depends upon whether
or not DC1/DC2 handshake is enabled. (Refer to the
Terminal Configuration Menu discussion in Section II for
handshake types.) If DC1/DC2 handshake is disabled, the
character is sent immediately after the escape sequence
is received from the host computer. If the handshake is
enabled, the character is sent after record mode is turned
off and a DC1 is received from the host computer.
A 256-character buffer is used to hold each record prior to
sending it to the specified “to” device(s). If the record ex-
ceeds 256 characters, the terminal's handshake holds off
any further transmission from the host until the buffer's
contents is sent to the “to” device(s). Records shorter than
256 characters are indicated by a *+ (linefeed) character.
Again, the terminal’'s handshake holds off any further
transmission from the host until the record in the buffer is
sent to the “to” device(s).
If record mode is turned off, the contents of a partially filled
buffer will be sent to the “to” device(s).
If the record mode termination character is the first char-
acter into the buffer, record mode is terminated; the ter-
mination character is not sent to the “to” device(s).
Expanded Characters
The integral printer can print expanded characters in
which each print line contains up to 40 characters spaced
five to the inch (see figure 5-1).
From the keyboard, you enable and disable expanded char-
acter printing by pressing the EXPAND PRINT key ( NE).
When enabled, an asterisk appears in the key label.
5-2
Normal-Sized Characters
Underlined
inverse Videq
Compressed (Characters
Underlined
Truerse Vided
Expanded Characters
Underlined
Vide do
Il mverse
Figure 5-1. Character Sizes and Enhancements as Printed
on the Integral Printer
If data is being copied from display and a line is longer than
40 characters, the printer automatically performs a %'r
after 40 characters and prints the remainder of the charac-
ters on the next line.
From a program operating in a host computer, you enable
and disable the printing of expanded characters using the
following escape sequences:
ENABLE: “ak 15 orEeap 150
DISABLE: %&k 0S or rap 14C
Once the printing of expanded characters is enabled, it
remains enabled until explicitly disabled, until com-
pressed characters are enabled, until a hard reset is per-
formed, or until the power is turned off.
Compressed Characters
The integral printer can print compressed characters in
which each print line contains up to 132 characters spaced
16.2 to the inch (see figure 5-1).
From the keyboard, you enable and disable compressed
character printing using the COMPRESS key (MM). When
enabled, an asterisk appears in the key label.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable the printing of compressed characters using
the following escape sequences:
ENABLE: &&k 2S orfsp 16C
DISABLE: "ak 05 ortáp 14C
Once the printing of compressed characters is enabled, it
remains enabled until explicitly disabled, until expanded
characters are enabled, until a hard reset is performed, or
until the power is turned off.
Lines longer than 80 characters can only be sent to the
printer from datacomm; lines from the display do not ex-
ceed 80 displayable characters. When sending lines from
datacomm to the printer, either the t 4pW escape sequence
or Record Mode may be used. The method of using the
escape sequence follows:
Define integral printer as
the destination device: “ap 6D
Send records to
the destination device: “&pW (first record)
T4pW (second record)
ápW (last record)
To send data to the printer using record mode, type the
appropriate host computer system command to list the
data; then, before terminating the command, enter record
mode. You can do this from the keyboard by pressing:
device device | RECORD
control modes MODE
After record mode is entered, terminate the command
(usually this is done by pressing ). Data received over
datacomm is sent directly to the printer; it does not appear
on the display. Record mode may be turned off by pressing
the “RECORD MODE” softkey again (the asterisk will disap-
pear from the key label).
[HIDSI»
The details of record mode are discussed previously in this
section.
The integral printer normally operates in continuous
forms mode without regard for page boundaries. You can,
however, enable report format in which printed output is
treated as a series of 66-line pages (a 3-line top margin, 60
lines of text, and a 3-line bottom margin). The margins and
Printer Control
text area together form an 872 inch by 10% inch page. The
printer uses a small tic mark to mark the end of one page
ll Ala E a a aa AE a md Report Lonmin a a da a a la m
anu LIE VOS IIS Ul LIIC LIUAL. PULL LUE LUS LUQUE 15 SITU YI
in figure 5-2.
From the keyboard, you enable and disable report format
using the REPORT PRINT key ( MEAN ). This key alternately
enables and disables report format. When enabled, an as-
terisk appears in the key display; the asterisk in ME, if
on, is turned off; and the printer skips 3 lines, prints a page
break, and skips 3 lines.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable report format using the following escape
sequences:
ENABLE: “tap 17C
DISABLE: “rap 19C
Once enabled, report format remains enabled until ex-
plicitly disabled, until metric format is enabled, until a
hard reset is performed, or until the power is turned off.
Metric Format
The integral printer normally operates in continuous
forms mode without regard for page boundaries. You can,
however, enable metric format in which printed output
mg
Zn
3-LINE BOTTOM =
MARGIN eee,
— TIC MARK BETWEEN
3-LINE TOP = PAGES
MARGIN
REPORT MODE: 60 LINES
OF TEXT PER PAGE
TEXT LINES
METRIC MODE: 64 LINES
OF TEXT PER PAGE
A
— CA
3-LINE BOTTOM SOS
MARGIN N
3-LINE TOP = PAGES
MARGIN
Figure 5-2. Report and Metric Formats
Printer Control
is treated as a series of 70-line pages (a 3-line top margin,
64 lines of text, and a 3-line bottom margin). The printer
uses a small tic mark to mark the end of one page and
the beginning of the next. Metric format is illustrated in
figure 5-2.
From the keyboard, you enable and disable metric format
using the METRIC PRINT key (IKE). This key alternately
enables and disables metric format. When enabled, an as-
terisk appears in the key display; the asterisk in MZ, if
on, is turned off; and the printer skips 3 lines, prints a page
break, and skips 3 lines.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable metric format using the following escape se-
quences:
ENABLE: “ap 18C
DISABLE: “cap 19C
Once enabled, metric format remains enabled until ex-
plicitly disabled, until report format is enabled, until a
hard reset is performed, or until the power is turned off.
DATA LOGGING
The terminal includes a mechanism called “data logging”
whereby data can be automatically routed to the integral
printer and/or an external printer. There are two types of
data logging: top and bottom.
Top Logging
When the display is filled and another line of data is en-
tered through the keyboard or received over a datacomm
line, the top line in the display is purged to make room for
the new line. With top logging, each line that is purged
from the top of the display is printed. Thus, while the
line is “lost” from display memory, it is maintained in
hard copy form.
Bottom Logging
With bottom logging, each time the cursor moves from one
line to another as the result of an explicit line feed or an
end-of-line-wraparound, the line from which the cursor
moved is printed. This feature allows you to maintain a
hard copy “trail” of all lines added to the display in the
order in which they were entered and/or received.
When performing data logging in remote mode, the termi-
nal and host computer must be using the ENQ-ACK or
XON-XOFF handshakes or they must be using a baud rate
that is equal to or less than the rate at which the slowest
selected printer can function. (For individual lines being
logged sporadically on the integral printer, 1200 baud may
work; for a series of successive lines, however, you will
probably have to drop to 600 baud.)
5-4
From the keyboard, you enable and disable data logging
using the LOG TOP (MM) and LOG BOTTOM (AM) keys.
These keys alternately enable and disable top logging and
bottom logging, respectively. When either is enabled, an
asterisk appears in the associated key display.
From a program executing in a host computer, you enable
and disable data logging using the following escape se-
quences:
ENABLE BOTTOM LOGGING: “sp 11C
ENABLE TOP LOGGING: “ap 12C
DISABLE LOGGING: “sp 13C
Both forms of data logging may NOT be enabled simultane-
ously.
Once either form of data logging is enabled, it remains
enabled until explicitly disabled, until the other form of
data logging is enabled, until a hard reset is performed, or
until the power is turned off.
Note that the keyboard is temporarily locked while a line of
data is being “logged”. This may make it difficult to per-
form any keyboard operations if a large quantity of data is
coming into the display over a datacomm line rapidly
enough to result in continuous logging.
DISPLAY TO PRINTER
ALPHANUMERIC DATA TRANSFERS
The display is defined as the “from” device in alphanumeric
data transfers to the integral printer and/or external
printer. If you define the integral printer and/or external
printer as destination (“to”) devices, you can use the
“device control” set of system function keys to print one or
more lines of data from the display. One way of getting to
the “device control” keys is the following keystroke
sequence:
[ri]
device
control
This changes the function key labels to the following:
[AI DS)
, [£1] [#21 [#3] [f4]
modes INT PRT PAGE
ON |
2622A [£7] [£8]
COPY -
RS EE Le SE
4
ON
2623 A | [+51 [+6] [£7] [TG]
Press for the integral printer on the HP 2622A.
For data transfers initiated thro
memory is always the source (“from”) device while the
integral printer and/or an external printer are the destina-
tion (“to”) devices. To select an external printer as the “to”
device, press the “TO EXT DEV” function key ( ). To
select the integral printer as the “to” device, press the “TO
INT PRT” function key ( ). When a printer is selected as
the current “to” device, an asterisk appears in the associ-
ated function key label. You may, if you so desire, have both
printers selected as “to” devices simultaneously.
1e keyboard, display
Programmatically, vou can define the “to” devices by usin
a a са, - a —— ep maa a wm we a aa = + — -
a device control escape sequence (E 4p):
Select external device: fap 4D
Select internal printer: “ap 6D
Select both: “tap 4deD
Copy Line
When either or both of the printers are selected as a des-
tination device, you can copy the line containing the cursor
from the display to the printer(s). The entire line is copied.
Block terminators are ignored. After the line is printed, the
cursor moves to the leftmost column in the next lower line
(column 0, NOT the left margin). If the cursor is on an
empty line, COPY LINE should not cause anything to print.
From the keyboard, you copy one line of data using the
COPY LINE key (MEME ) in the device control set of system
function keys.
From a program executing in a host computer, you copy one
line of data using one of the following escape sequences:
“c&p B or fap 0B
Copy Page
When either or both of the printers are selected as the
destination device, you can copy all lines, starting with the
line containing the cursor through the last line visible on
the screen, to the printer(s). Block terminators are ignored.
After each line is printed the cursor moves to the leftmost
column in the next lower line (column 0, NOT the left
margin). If the cursor is at a line that is beyond the last
displayable line, the printer does nothing.
From the keyboard, you copy a page of data using the
COPY PAGE key ( ) in the device control set of sys-
tem function keys.
From a program operating in a host computer, you copy a
page of data using one of the following escape sequences:
‘cep F or cep OF
Copy All
When either or both of the printers are selected as the
destination device, you can copy all lines, starting with the
Printer Control
line containing the cursor through the last line of display
memory, to the printer(s). Block terminators are ignored.
After each line is printed the cursor moves to the leftmost
column in the next lower line (column 0, NOT the left
margin). If the cursor 18 at a line that is bevond the last
= it = Бе = сео = — —— чин чан Aa
displayable line, the printer does nothing.
From the keyboard, you copy “all” using the COPY ALL
(KM ) key in the device control set of system function
keys.
From a program executing in a host computer, you copy
“all” using one of the following escape sequences:
E +. M am Es AM
capi Gr cep vri
Copy All of Display Memory
When either or both of the printers are selected as a des-
tination (“to”) device, you can copy all of display memory to
it by using an%0 sequence. In response to this sequence, the
terminal homes the cursor and then copies the entire con-
tent of display memory to the printer(s).
During the data transfer, block terminators and non-
displaying terminators within display memory are
ignored.
The t0 sequence may be entered through the keyboard,
issued from a user-defined function key, or issued from a
program executing in a host computer.
When the terminal is in local mode, pressing the key
performs this same function.
Copy Menu
When either or both of the printers are selected as a des-
tination (“to”) device and a configuration menu is cur-
rently being displayed on the screen, you can copy the
menu to the printer(s) by pressing the key.
Skip Line
When either or both of the printers are selected as a des-
tination device, pressing the ADVANCE LINE key ( ) in
the device control set of system function keys sends an
ASCII % *r control code sequence to the printer(s), thus
causing the paper to be advanced by one line.
Programmatically, you can cause a line feed on the integral
printer by using the following device control escape
sequence:
EXTERNAL PRINTER: “rap 1c4u1P
The “p” parameter in the above escape sequences specifies
how many line feeds you wish performed. To initiate four
successive line feeds, for example, merely substitute “4P”
for the “1P” sequence.
5-5
Printer Control
Skip Page
When either or both of the printers are selected as a des-
tination device, pressing the ADVANCE PAGE key ( MEE ) in
the device control set of system function keys sends an
ASCII fr control code to the printer(s), thus causing the
paper to be advanced to the top of the next page.
When the integral printer is selected as a “to” device, this
control function causes a true form feed only if report
format or metric format is enabled. In all other cases, the
advance page function merely causes the integral printer
to advance the paper one line.
Programmatically, you can cause a form feed on the printer
by using the following device control escape sequence:
INTEGRAL PRINTER: “tap Oc 6U
EXTERNAL PRINTER: “rap Oc4U
Note that the values 2 through 10 may also be used with
the “c” parameter (instead of the zero); this will also in-
itiate one form feed.
Also note that the parameter “4U” may be redefined by way
of the PrinterCode4 configuration parameter to signify
the integral printer in the HP 2623A (see description of
the External Device Configuration menu discussed later
in this section.)
The HP 2622A terminal directs “4U” controls to “6U” (the
optional integral printer).
The control code for a Form Feed (CNTRL L) produces var-
ious results depending on the conditions existing when a
Form Feed is encountered. If REPORT mode is disabled,
Form Feed is ignored.
IFREPORT mode is enabled, and LOG TOP and LOG BOTTOM are
disabled, Form Feed results in a top-of-page operation on
the printer (skip to new page and print tic mark).
IFREPORT mode is enabled, and LOG TOP is enabled, Form
Feed results in completion of logging from the screen to the
printer, a top-of-page operation on the printer (skip to new
page and print tic mark), and a top-of-page operation on
the screen (home up, clear display).
If REPORT mode is enabled, and LOG BOTTOM is enabled,
Form Feed results in a top-of-page operation on the printer
(skip to new page and print tic mark), and a top-of-page
operation on the screen (nome up, clear display).
Device Control Completion Codes
After issuing a copy line, copy page, copy all, skip line, or
skip page %&p sequence, the remote program determines
5-6
whether or not the operation was successfully performed
by executing an INPUT or similar instruction that re-
quests one ASCII character from the terminal. The ter-
minal responds by sending an “s”, “F”, or “U”. Ап “5” in-
dicates successful completion, an “F” indicates that the
operation failed, and a “U” indicates that the terminal
operator interrupted the data transfer by pressing .
Note that these completion codes cannot be suppressed by
configuration parameters or any other means. They are
always transmitted and your programs should include
input commands explicitly for accepting them. The
keyboard is disabled (“locked”) until the status is sent.
Note that in either character or block line mode, the termi-
nal sends a % (or a ® *r if auto line feed mode is enabled)
following the completion code. In block page mode, it sends
a block terminator character (as defined in the Terminal
Configuration menu described in Section II of this
manual). |
If a datacomm error occurs during the transmission of the
data record, the device control completion code is
unpredictable. Datacomm errors are reported by way of the
terminal status bytes described in Section VII.
GRAPHICS MEMORY TO PRINTER
DATA TRANSFERS (HP 2623A)
Graphics memory to printer data transfers may be in-
itiated either by the graphics/numeric keypad or by escape
sequence. The [GRAPH COPY] key initiates the transfer
from the keypad. Note that the graphics functions of the
keypad are enabled at power-on, hard reset, or when togg-
led by the keys. The escape sequence to initiate
the transfer is:
Initiate graphics transfer: "*4p7sF
Note: 7s sets up the source as graphics memory, the de-
fault is alphanumeric memory.
The integral printer is the default destination device. An
external printer may be selected as the destination by the
system softkeys or “táp escape sequence. The external
printer is configured by the External Device Configuration
Menu (discussed later in the section). When selecting the
external printer as the destination for graphics data,
parity must be set to None in the configuration menu.
To select the external printer by using the softkeys, press
device
BEI {RAR |
[£1]
[AIDS],
This changes the function key labels to the following:
device NE TO
control INT PRT DISPLAY
[41] [+3] [f4]
Press IH for the external printer. An asterisk appears in
the label when a device is selected.
To select either or both printers as the destination by using
the escape sequence:
Select external printer
as the destination: “rap 4D
Select integral printer
as the destination: “ap 6D
Select both printers
as the destination: “ap 4d6D
You may combine device selection and transfer initiation
in one escape sequence:
Select external printer
as destination and
initiate graphics copy: “&p 4dF
COMPUTER TO TERMINAL
DATA TRANSFERS
When either of both of the printers are selected as a des-
tination (“to”) device, you can initiate a data transfer from
a program executing in a host computer to the printer(s) by
using the following device control escape sequence:
4p <character-count> W<record>
where:
<character-count> is an integer within the range 1-256
specifying the number of binary bytes in
<record>. The record is terminated
when the specified number of binary
bytes have been transmitted. If this pa-
rameter is not present ASCII transfers
are initiated and the record is terminated
when the 256th data byte after the “W” is
transmitted or by the first ASCII ++ code,
whichever occurs first. If the record is
terminated by an *, the + 15 also passed
to the printer.
<record> is the data record to be transmitted.
Example: Send the next 15 binary bytes from the com-
puter to all “to” devices.
Tép 15W
This escape sequence is recognized only when received over
a data comm line. It is ignored if entered through the
keyboard.
You may include the desired destination device assign-
ment(s) within the escape sequence by using the “d” com-
mand parameter. You may also, prior to issuing the above
escape sequence, define the desired destination devices
either locally through the keyboard or programmatically
by way of a separate device control (tap) sequence. In any
case, the only destination devices that are recognized by
this type of data transfer operation are the display (3d) and
the integral printer (6d), and/or an external printer (4d).
Printer Control
If no destination devices are specified within the above
escape sequence, the the current “to” device assignments
are used. If nothing is currently selected as a “to” device,
the data record is accepted over the data comm port and
then is discarded by the terminal (also an “F ” is returned as
the device control completion code).
Binary transfers are of the form T&p <character-count>
W <record>. ASCII transfers are of the form T&p W
<recor d>, where as ASCII ‘+ or the 256th data byte ter-
minates the record. In binary transfers, all eight bits
received are passed to the printer. Parity checking and
transmission is disabled. In ASCII transfers, seven bits
will be passed to the printer.
If the escape sequence does NOT include a <character-
count>, then the following applies:
o IfEngAck = YES in the active data communications con-
figuration menu, the data comm firmware strips all
<ENQ> codes from the incoming data and responds to each
by transmitting an <ACK>.
If the escape sequence includes a <character-count>,
then the following apply:
e IfEngAck = YES in the active data communications con-
figuration menu, an <ENQ> code immediately following
the “W” and preceding the data record is treated as part of
an Enq-Ack handshake (the data comm firmware strips
the <ENG> code from the incoming data and responds to it
by sending an <ACK>).
e After the optional leading Eng-Ack handshake, ALL
characters received are treated as data (including <ENO>,
<ACK>, <NULL>, and <DEL>) regardiess of the setting of
the EngAck configuration fields.
When transferring a data record from the host computer to
the printer using the above device control escape sequence,
the remote program determines whether or not the opera-
tion was successfully performed by executing an INPUT or
similar instruction that requests one ASCII character from
the terminal. The terminal responds by sending an “S”, “F”,
or “U”. An “S” indicates successful completion, an “F” indi-
cates that the operation failed, and a “U” indicates that the
terminal operator interrupted the data transfer by press-
ing 3. Note that these completion codes cannot be
suppressed by configuration parameters or any other
means. They are always transmitted and your programs
should include input commands explicitly for accepting
them. The keyboardis disabled (“locked”) until the status 15
sent.
Note that in either character or block line mode, the ter-
minal sends a % (or a kr if auto line feed mode is enabled)
following the completion code; in block page mode, it sends
a block terminator character (as defined in the Terminal
Configuration menu).
If a data comm error occurs during the transmission of the
data record, the device control completion code is un-
predictable. Data comm errors are reported by way of the
terminal status bytes described in Section VIII of this
manual.
5-7
Printer Control
INTEGRAL PRINTER SELF-TEST
The terminal includes a printer self-test feature that exer-
cises the integral printer to verify that it is functioning
properly.
From the keyboard, you initiate the printer self-test using
the following keystroke sequence:
[#3 ) [FB]
[AID], EE INT PRT
keys TEST
If the printer is present and functioning properly, it
generates the test pattern shown in figure 5-3.
If an error condition is detected while the test is being
executed, the message “INTEGRAL PRINTER ERROR” appears
across the bottom of the screen. To clear the message, press
(ID. Note that the error condition may be either of the
following, in which case you could correct it yourself:
1. Out of paper.
2. The metal latch (under the plastic printer lid) is not
pressed down securely. See Section IX, figure 9-3.
The printer self-test cannot be initiated programmatically.
Note that while the printer self-test is in progress the
terminal’s interrupt mechanism is disabled. If you initiate
this test while data is being received over a datacomm port,
some of that data could get lost.
CONFIGURING THE EXTERNAL PRINTER
The HP 2623 A has an external printer port for interfacing
RS-232C serial printers. Configuring an external printer
consists of cabling it to the port and specifying parameters
in the configuration menu.
Cabling
The HP 2623A has an external device port, along with the
data communications port, at the rear of the terminal (see
figure 5-4).
The HP 13242 cables listed in table 5-1 both have a male
RS-232C connector on one end and either a male or female
RS-232C connector on the other. The male end attaches to
the external device port on the rear of the terminal, and the
other end attaches to the external printer as shown in
figure 5-5. For the HP 13242G Cable, which has a male
connector on each end, it makes no difference which end is
attached to the terminal.
Since the external device connector on the terminal is a
standard RS-232C female connector, you can use cables
other than those listed in table 5-1 as long as they have a
male RS-232C connector on one end and their pin-outs are
compatible with those of the HP 13242 cables.
Filling In The Configuration Menu
Now that you have made the physical connections between
the terminal and the external printer, you are ready to
configure the terminal’s external device port.
To configure the port, first use the following keystroke
sequence:
MILE EEE
[AIDS]:
LESA
[+8]
This changes the function key labels to the following:
datacomm@iext dev
config config
+1]
[#2] (+3) [+4]
terminal
config
[+51 [#6] (+?) [48]
The ext dev config function key, when pressed, causes the
external device configuration menu to appear on the
screen and redefines the function keys to a set of functions
that will assist you in manipulating the various
parameters within the menu (see figure 5-6). The configu-
ration menu displays the currently stored menu
parameters from non-volatile memory.
GREC DEFGHIJK LMNOPORS TUVWXYZE
@ABC DEFGHI JK
WHC DEFGHIK LMNOPORS ТОМЕ VIA. |
eAEC DEFG @ABC_ DEFG PARC
\]*_‘abe
LMNOPORS
‘abc defohijk__Innopors tuveyzt 14
© _DEFG
defghijk lmnopgrs tuvwxyz{ 134
ТОРЫ) МОЙ Е NI”
Mes 74/0x+, -./01024 56700: SR
Figure 5-3. Integral Printer Self-Test Output
Printer Control
PORT #1 PORT #2
Figure 5-4. HP 2623A Graphics Terminal, Rear View
25-PIN CONNECTOR
RS-232C
25-PIN CONNECTOR
TO EXTERNAL PRINTER
HP 13242
Figure 5-5. External Device Port Cabling (HP 13242 Cables)
Printer Control
Table 5-1. External Device Port Data Communications Cables
Cable No. HP Part No.
Description
13242G 13242-60010
13242H 13242-60011
RS232 PRINTER CBL (MALE)
Male RS-232C 25-pin connector for interfacing the terminal to RS-232C com-
patible printers such as the HP 2631 and HP 2635.
Length: 15 feet (4.5 meters)
RS232 PRINTER CBL (FEMALE)
Female RS-232C 25-pin connector for interfacing the terminal to RS-232C
compatible printers.
Length: 15 feet (4.5 meters)
Whenever a configuration menu is displayed on the screen,
the terminal is implicitly in format mode. The menu con-
tains a set of unprotected fields that you access using the
key. For most of the fields (the ones containing the
underlined video enhancement) you select the desired pa-
rameters using the “NEXT CHOICE” ( ) and “PREVIOUS
CHOICE” ( ) function keys.
The meanings of the various fields are described in table
5-2.
Eaudrate [2400 Farity
EXTERNAL DEVICE CONFIGURATION
XmitFace None |]
SAVE NEXT PREVIOUSEDEFHULT
CONFIG CHOICE NO YALUES
PrinterCode4 EXT PrinterNulle 000
SERXmjt N
SREInvert [N CSCCH)Xmit [MU
DISPLHY config
FUNCTNS keys
Figure 5-6. External Device Configuration Menu
Table 5-2. External Device Configuration Menu Fields
Values: NONE
0°S
ODD
1°S
EVEN
This field specifies at what speed you want the data transmission to take place (in bits per second).
BaudRate
Values: 110
134.5
150
300
Parity
This field specifies what type of parity generation and checking you wish used with each data
character. (Note that parity must be set to None for binary transfers.)
600 2400
1200 4800
1800 9600
(no parity bit)
(parity bit always zero)
(odd parity)
(parity bit always one)
(even parity)
5-10
Printer Control
Table 5-2. External Device Configuration Menu Fields (Continued)
PrinterCode4 The field specifies which printer (an external printer or the integral printer) will respond to device
code “4” when the terminal receives a device control escape sequence from the host computer.
Device code “4” is ordinarily used only for selecting an external printer. Through the use of this
configuration parameter, however, you can redirect the device control operations to the integral
printer without altering the host computer program.
Values: EXT (external printer)
INT (integral printer)
Default: EXT
PrinterNulls This field specifies the number of ASCH null codes (0-255) to be transmitted to an external printer
after each ASCII control code.
Value: 0-255
Default: 0
Xmi tPace Transmit pacing is a mechanism by which the remote device can control (stop and resume) the
transmission of data from the terminal.
If enabled, transmit pacing is performed using XON and XOFF control codes. When the terminal
receives an XOFF code (ASCII <DC3>), it stops transmitting data. When the terminal subsequently
receives an XON code (ASCII «<DC1>), it resumes transmitting data. This should not be used with
DC1/DC2 handshaking.
H this field is set to “NGNE”, the terminal does NOT recognize the ASCH <DC1> and <DC3> codes as
XON and XOFF.
For other forms of transmit pacing, refer to the descriptions of the SRRXmit and CS(CB)Xmitfields
below.
Values: NONE
XonXoff
Default: NONE
SRRXmit This field specifies whether or not a true state (—12V) on the RS-232C Secondary Receiver Ready
(SRR) or Secondary Carrier Detect (SCF) control line is a required condition for transmitting data.
This mechanism is primarily used in conjunction with printers which must be able to control the
transmission of data from other devices. The SRR/SCF control line is connected to RS-232C pin
number 12.
Values: YES
ND
Default: NO
SRRInvert This field applies only when the SRA Xmit field is set to “ves”. When both the sRrRxmit and SRRIn-
vert fields are set to “YES”, the true state of the RS-232C Secondary Receiver Ready (SRR) or
Secondary Carrier Detect (SCF) control line is inverted from —12V to +12V.
Values: YES
NO
Default: NO
CSCCBIXmit This field specifies whether or not a true state (—12V) on the RS-232C Clear to Send (CS/CB) control
line is a required condition for transmitting data. For a modem configuration, it is set to “ves”. Also, if
the Asterisk field is set to “cs” then csCcB)xmit should be set to “YES”.
Values: YES
NO
Default: NO
5-11/5-12
Data Communications
SECTION
VI
INTRODUCTION
The term “data communications” (or “datacomm”) refers
to the transfer of data between the terminal and a host
computer.
‘There are several ways to connect the terminal to a com-
puter. To arrive at a particular way you must compare a
number of factors and make a series of decisions. After
selecting the necessary equipment and cables, you must
then physically connect the terminal to the computer (or to
the modem, if that is what you have chosen) and configure
the terminal for use with the particular type of data com-
munications link.
This section is divided into four parts:
1. The first is a general discussion that should help you
decide what type of equipment and cabling you need for
the data link.
2. The second tells you how to physically install the
terminal.
3. The third tells you how to configure the terminal to
operate properly with the selected type of data link.
4. The final part provides programming reference ma-
terial for someone who is writing a datacomm driver or
controller program to communicate with the terminal
‚зп a point-to-point environment.
Before proceeding with the decision making process, it may
help to briefly define the most important terminology as it
pertains to data communications.
Communications
Link: The means by which a terminal is connected
to a host computer. This always includes some
type of communications line (a coaxial cable,
the public telephone network, or a leased
telephone line), and it may also include a pair
of modems (one at each end of the line).
Point-to-Point: A data communications configuration in which
a single terminal is connected to a host com-
puter over a communications link. The terminal
is designed for use with a point-to-point com-
munications link.
A mode of transmission in which each data
character is framed by a “start bit” and one or
~ more “stop bits”. The interval between suc-
cessive data characters is random. The termi-
nal is designed for use with an asynchronous
communications link.
Asynchronous:
A communications link in which data can be
transmitted in both directions simultaneously.
The terminal is designed for full duplex data
communications.
Full Duplex:
Character Mode: When the terminal is operating in character
mode, it sends data characters to the com-
puter one at a time as they are typed into the
keyboard.
Block Mode: When the terminal is operating in block mode,
data characters typed into the keyboard are
merely stored in display memory. When a
block transfer is subsequently triggered (by
the host computer or by pressing the
key), a group of data characters is sent from
the terminal to the computer as a block.
A point-to-point configuration is the standard form of
data communications within the industry (it is some-
times referred to as a “Teletype-compatible” communica-
tions link). Point-to-point is supported by most comput-
ers. At any given time, it accommodates only one termi-
nal per communications link; it may, however, operate in
either character mode or biock mode.
A major consideration in selecting which type of connection
to use is the anticipated distance between the terminal and
the computer. If the terminal will be located in the vicinity
of the computer system, you may use a hardwired connec-
tion. The Electrical Industry Association (EIA) Standard
RS-232-C (to which the terminal conforms) limits cable
lengths to a maximum of 15 meters (50 feet).
Another consideration is the desired availability of the
particular computer port. If you wish to have it available
(at different times) to terminals in diverse and/or varying
locations, then you should choose a modem connection with
dial-up capability.
HARDWIRED CONNECTIONS
If you decide on a point-to-point hardwired connection, the
only decision that remains to be made is the type of cable to
be used. The available cables are summarized in table 6-1.
Please note that a hardwired connection for your termi-
nal is always full duplex (the terminal does not support
half-duplex connections).
MODEM CONNECTIONS
If you decide on a point-to-point modem connection, you
must now decide what type of modem to use. Note that
point-to-point as supported by the terminal always
employs asynchronous transmission. You will therefore be
limiting your choice of modem to the asynchronous variety.
Refer to table 6-2 for help in selecting the proper modem.
6-1
Data Communications
Table 6-1. Data Communications Cables and Test Connectors
Cable No. HP Part No. Description
13222C 13222-60003 TERMINALTO RS232 CABLE
50 PIN TO 25 PIN CABLE
Female RS-232-C 25-pin connector.
Length: 2 meters (6.6 feet)
13222M 13222-60002 EUROPEAN MODEM CABLE
Male RS-232-C 25-pin connector for interfacing the terminal to the European
telephone system via Bell 103 or 202C type European modems.
Length: 5 meters (16.7 feet)
13222N 13222-60001 U.S. MODEM CABLE
Male RS-232-C 25-pin connector for interfacing the terminal to an HP 1000,
2000, or 3000 Multiplexer; to a Bell 103A, 202C/D/S/T, 212A, or VADIC 3400
modem; or to an acoustic coupler (signal compatible only).
Length: 5 meters (16.7 feet)
13222W 13222-60007 13222-60007 (W)
Female RS-232-C 25-pin connector for interfacing the terminal to an HP 300
Computer System.
Length: 5 meters (16.7 feet)
13222Y 13222-60005 EMP PROTECT (MALE)
Male RS-232-C 25-pin connector for interfacing the terminal to an HP 1000,
2000, or 3000 Multiplexer. Provides protection from lightning-induced tran-
sients. For use in hardwired configurations only.
Length: 5 meters (16.7 feet)
13232U 5061-2403 Modem bypass cable with a female RS-232-C 25-pin connector on both ends. It
crosses the signals so that two terminals can communicate with one another.
Length: 1.5 meters (5 feet)
— 02620-60056 This is a male 50-pin test hood for use on port #1.
— 02620-60062 This is a male RS-232C test hood for use on port #2.
— 02645-6004 This is a female RS-232C test hood for use on an HP 13222 or 13242 datacomm
cable. They are available as a 3-item set which can be ordered either with the
terminal (as option 981) or separately (as the HP 13259A Datacomm Self-Test
Connector Kit).
Modem Considerations
If you are communicating with the host computer through
a modem, it may be necessary for you to turn on a modem
power switch or make modem parity setting changes. The
modem’s baud rate and parity settings should be the same
as those configured in the terminal.
The terminal supports the Bell 103A, Bell 212A, or equiva-
lent type of modem.
Whenever the modem line (Data Set Ready) is active, an
asterisk appears between the fourth and fifth screen
labels at the bottom of the screen. If your facility requires
the display of this “active modem” indicator, do not shut
off the screen labels display.
6-2
The asterisk between the fourth and fifth screen label is
controlled by an LED which tracks the Data Set Ready
(DSR) input line to the terminal. When a modem is con-
nected, the DSR line is low (active) and the modem in-
dicator (asterisk) is on. When the DSR line is high, this
signals a modem disconnect and the asterisk disappears
from the screen.
INSTALLING A
POINT-TO-POINT CONFIGURATION
The terminal's datacomm port may be connected to a com-
puter via a 50-pin, female RS-232-C compatible connector
provided on the back of the terminal (see figure 6-1).
Data Communications
Table 6-2. Modems
Data Rate Duplex Dialed/ Reverse
MODEM (Bits/Sec) Full/Half Leased Channel
HP 13265A 300 F D No
Bell 103A 300 F/H D/L No
Bell 202T 1200 F/H L Option
Bell 202D (see note 2)
Vadic VA3400 1200 D No
(see note 1)
NOTES: 1. Can be configured for either asynchronous or synchronous operation. With the HP 2622A or HP 2623A,
however, it must be configured for asynchronous operation.
2. C2 line conditioning allows operation at 1800 bits per second.
CABLING
The HP 13222 cables listed in table 6-1 all have a male
50-pin connector on one end and either a male or female
RS-232-C connector on the other. The 50-pin end is the
wider of the two (approximately 7 cm or 2% inches wide)
and you attach it to the connector on the rear panel of the
terminal. The RS-232-C end attaches to the modem, com-
puter multiplexer panel, external printer, or interface
cable as illustrated in figure 6-2.
You may also connect either an HP 13265A Modem or an
HP 13266A Current Loop Converter to the connector as
illustrated in figure 6-3.
CONFIGURING THE TERMINAL
Once the physical connections between the terminal and
the computer or modem are complete, the terminal can be
configured.
To configure the datacommunications portion of the termi-
nal, first use the following keystroke sequence:
[#8] [#3]
[RIDS], config Mdatacom
(QT TES contig
POWER SWITCH
DATACOMM
CONNECTOR
KEYBOARD
CONNECTOR
Figure 6-1. HP 2622A Display Terminal, Rear View
6-3
Data Communications
1 PORT 2 K Y HI
| RS-232C
\ 25-PIN
CONNECTOR
FEMALE HP 13222
50-PIN
CONNECTOR
CABLE Interface cable to host computer
Multiplexer panel on host computer
Modem
Modem bypass cable (HP 13232U)
> © N =
Figure 6-2. HP 2623A Terminal Cabling (HP 13222 Cables)
PORT 1 PRAT 2?
>
—
FEMALE
50-PIN
CONNECTOR
HP 13265A MODEM
OR
HP 13266A CURRENT LOOP CONNECTOR
Figure 6-3. HP 2623A Terminal Cabling (HP 13265A Modem or HP 13266A Current Loop Converter)
6-4
When you press the datacomm config ( ) function key,
the datacomm configuration menu currently stored in non-
volatile memory appears on the screen and the function
key labels change to the following:
[+2] [+3] [+4]
SAVE | NEXT BPREVIOQOUSSDEFAULT |
CONFIG CHOICE CHOICE VALUES
[+5] [+6] [+7] [+5]
DISPLAY config
FUNCTNS keys
Note that if you have not previously stored a menu in
non-volatile memory, the default values are displayed in
E nz и mm a a Aa o . on ©
the configuration menu (see figure 6-4).
The menu contains a set of unprotected fields that you .
access using the key. You select the desired parame-
ters in these fields using the NEXT CHOICE (ME) and
Data Communications
The meanings of the various fields in datacomm menu are
described in table 6-3.
When you have set all the fields to the desired values, you
may then save them in non-volatile memory using the
SAVE CONF IG ( MEE) function key. Note that when you do
this, the particular datacomm configuration takes effect
immediately.
While the datacomm configuration menu is displayed on
the screen, the and MEM keys have the effects
described below:
4] Pressing this key causes all fields in the menu
DEFAULT .
to be filled with their default values.
PREVIOUS CHOICE (MEM) function keys.
DATRE DM CONFIGURATION
BaudRate Parity Enghck jas
Chk Parity JET SRUCH)
RecwPace None | ESCCRIXmit BL
XmitPace TIEN
Figure 6-4. Datacomm Configuration Menu
Table 6-3. Datacomm Configuration Menu Fields
BaudRate This field specifies at what speed you want the data transmission to take place.
Values: 110 600 4800
134.5 1200 9600
150 1800
300 2400 (default)
NOTE
For 110 baud, the terminal is automatically configured to transmit 2 stop bits
with the data to the computer. At 110 baud, the terminal also expects to receive
2 stop bits with the data received from the computer. For all other baud rates, 1
stop bit is transmitted with data and expected to be received with data.
Parity This field specifies what type of parity generation and checking you wish used with each data
character.
Values: NONE (no parity bit)
0°S (parity bit always zero) (default)
ODD (odd parity)
1°S (parity bit always one)
EVEN (even parity)
EngAck This field enables or disables the use of the Hewlett-Packard ENQ-ACK handshake. This type of
handshaking is described under “Pacing Mechanisms” in the "Point-to-Point Programming Infor-
mation” portion of this section.
Values: YES (enable) (default)
NO (disable)
Data Communications
Table 6-3. Datacomm Configuration Menu Fields (Continued)
Chk Parity
This field is used for enabling or disabling the parity check feature for data characters received
over the datacomm line. Note that if the Par i ty field (above) is set toNONE, then this field is ignored.
Note that parity is still transmitted.
Values: YES (enable)
NO (disable) (default)
SR(CH)
This field specifies the desired state of the RS-232-C SR line when the terminal's power is first
turned on or when the terminalis reset. The SR line, RS-232-C pin number 23, is defined as the Data
Signal Rate Detector (DTE Source). It is normally used on dual speed modems to select the
appropriate speed (single speed modems merely ignore this line).
Values: HI
LO (default)
RecvPace
Receive pacing is a mechanism by which the terminal automatically controls (halts and resumes)
the transmission of data from the remote device. There is one way of performing receive pacing: by
using the XON and XOFF control codes.
If this field is set to “XonXoff”, the terminal will automatically perform receive pacing using XON
(ASCII P;) and XOFF (ASCII %) control codes. With this type of receive pacing, the terminal causes
the remote device to halt transmission by sending an XOFF code and to resume transmission by
sending an XON code. For this type of receive pacing to work, the remote device must of course be
configured to start and stop transmission in response to XON and XOFF codes.
Note that if the remote device recognizes XON and XOFF codes and your terminal is operating in
character mode, you can issue the codes through the keyboard regardless of the setting of this
field. The and Q keys (when pressed simultaneously) generate an XON code and the and
S keys generate XOFF.
Values: NONE (default)
XON/XOFF
CSCCBIXmit
This field specifies whether or not a true state (—12V) on the RS-232-C Clear to Send (CS/CB)
control line is a required condition for transmitting data. For a modem configuration, it is recom-
mended that you set this field to “YES”.
Values: YES
NO (default)
XmitPace
Transmit pacing is a mechanism by which the remote device can control (stop and resume) the
transmission of data from the terminal.
If enabled, transmit pacing is performed using XON and XOFF control codes. When the terminal
receives an ХОРЕ code (ASCII 5), it stops transmitting data. When the terminal subsequently
receives an XON code (ASCII By), it resumes transmitting data. This should not be used with ©,
handshaking. Therefore, if Xmi tPace is enabled, I nhHndShk (G) and Inh& (H) in terminal configura-
tion must both be set to “YES”, which disables %/ handshaking.
If this field is set to "NONE", the terminal does NOT recognize the ASCII ®% and % codes as XON and
ХОРЕ
For another form of transmit pacing, refer to the description of the CS(CB)Xmit field above.
Values: NONE
XON/XOFF
[+8] Pressing this key removes the menu from the POINT-TO-POINT
screen (WITHOUT activating it or saving it in PROGRAMMING INFORMATION
eys
non-volatile memory) and returns the func-
tion key labels to the following:
(this label is blank
on the 2622A)
datacommlext dev
config config
termingl
config
This topic discusses programming information of interest
to someone whois writing a data communications driver or
controller program to communicate with the terminal in
an asynchronous point-to-point environment.
An asynchronous point-to-point data communications en-
vironment is characterized by a flow of characters that
have been produced over random time intervals. In order to
achieve hardware synchronization. each character is
delimited ыу < ALLA one or more “stop DILO .
Start And Stop Bits
These hardware-generated bits are used for synchronizing
the transmit and receive devices in an asynchronous envi-
ronment. A start bit is a “zero” line state (+12V) that lasts
for 1.0 bit time; it is affixed to the beginning of a serial
character bit stream (Which may also include a parity bit).
A stop bit is a mark or a “one” line state (- 12V) that lasts
for 1.0 bit time; it is appended to the end of each serial
character bit stream. After the stop bit, the line remains in
the mark state until the next character, signified by a start
bit, is transmitted.
The start and stop bits are not configurable. For 110 baud,
the terminal is automatically configured to transmit 2 stop
bits with the data to the computer. At 110 baud, the termi-
nal also expects to receive 2 stop bits with the data received
from the computer. For all other baud rates, 1 stop bit is
transmitted with data and 1 stop bit is expected to be
received with data.
Parity Checking
In an asynchronous point-to-point environment, the termi-
nal provides a vertical redundancy check (VRC), whichis a
character-based error checking mechanism for non-binary
data. With VRC, an additional bit is affixed to each charac-
ter to provide an expected high-order bit state for each
character. This type of parity generation and checking is a
means of determining the validity of data transfer on a
character-by-character basis.
Note that when 8-bit data is being exchanged, parity can-
not be used and the “Parity” field in the datacomm con-
figuration menu must be set to “NONE”. Otherwise, one of
the bits will be mistaken for parity.
The terminal offers the following four types of parity:
1. 0S.
2. I'S,
3. ODD.
The high-order bit is always a zero.
The high-order bit is always a one.
The high-order bit is set to a zero or a one,
whichever produces an odd number of one bits
in the overall character representation (the
seven data bits plus the eighth parity bit).
4. EVEN. The high-order bit is set to a zero or a one,
whichever produces an even number of one bits
in the overall character representation (the
seven data bits plus the eighth parity bit).
5. NONE. Eight bits of data are transmitted and received.
No parity bit is transmitted or received.
Data Communications
Receive Buffer
man = aaa Lan iaa CENTER
WIELD AS A LILISU LII/LIISU out rir O)
The terminal’s receive buf
storage area for accepting data from the remote device.
When you are using any type of receive pacing, this buffer
1s partitioned into a working buffer and a 40-byte overrun
area. For example, the specified buffer size is always 256
bytes, thus if receive pacing is being used, the working
buffer is 216 bytes long and the overrun area is 40 bytes
long. When the data being received exceeds the working
buffer and intrudes on the overrun area, the terminal will
exercise its receive pacing mechanism (send an XOFF, for
example, if XON/XOFF receive pacing is enabled) at that
time to temporarily halt the flow of data from the remote
device. When enough data has been processed so that the
receive buffer is only half full, the terminal then signals
the remote device to resume transmission (by sending an
XON, for example, if XON/XOFF receive pacing is
enabled).
There is no equivalent overrun area for transmitting data
from the terminal to the remote device.
Receive Errors
When receiving data from the remote device, the terminal
can detect the following three types of error conditions (in
addition to parity errors):
1. Character overruns—a character is received before the
preceding character was processed by the terminal's
datacomm firmware.
2. Framing errors—no stop bit was detected at the end of a
character.
3. Buffer overflows—the entire allocated buffer space is
filled (both the working buffer and the overrun area).
Receive errors, when detected, are reported to the remote
device by way of byte 5 of the primary terminal status
bytes. The remote device will not be able to determine
which type of error occurred. If multiple receive errors
occur simultaneously, only one will be reported.
When a datacomm receive error occurs, a delete character
(8) is placed in the datacomm queue and later it is dis-
played on the terminal screen.
NOTE
Because null and del characters are auto-
matically stripped from datacomm, the
only del characters appearing on the
screen from datacomm are the result of
datacomm errors.
Local/Remote Modes
The data communications portion of the terminal operates
independently whether the terminal is in local or remote
mode. If the terminal is switched from remote to local while
6-7
Data Communications
data is being received from the remote device, the
datacomm portion of the terminal continues receiving data
(it does NOT halt the transmission). In such a case, the data
received while the terminal is in local is discarded by the
terminal's maincode firmware.
Full-Duplex Operation
In a full-duplex environment, the terminal is capable of
transmitting and receiving data simultaneously. The
ability to transmit may be inhibited temporarily, but it is
never exclusive of the ability to receive. Two physical sets of
data lines are required; control lines are needed only when
hardware handshaking or a modem is used. Transitions on
the control lines have no effect on the actual trans-
mit/receive state of the terminal.
When the terminal is connected to the host computer via a
modem, the following primary control lines are required:
Request to Send (RS/CA)
Clear to Send (CS/CB)
Data Terminal Ready (CD/TR)
If the terminal is hardwired directly to an HP 3000 comput-
er system (no modem), only Transmit Data (SD/BA),
Receive Data (RD/BB), and Signal Ground (AB) are
required.
Pacing Mechanisms
In a full-duplex environment, the terminal can participate
in either of the following forms of transmit pacing:
1. Hardware handshake. The host computer can temporar-
ily restrain the terminal from transmitting by lowering
6-8
the Clear to Send (CB) line. Note that this type of trans-
mit pacing can only be used in a hardwired configura-
tion where the Clear to Send (CB) line exists in the
cabling.
2. XON-XOFF handshake. The host computer or external
printer uses the ASCII control codes XON (21) and XOFF
(%) to start and stop the terminal from transmitting.
Note that a single XON code cancels any number of pre-
ceding XOFF codes.
In a full-duplex environment, the terminal can also partici-
pate in the XON/XOFF handshake form of receive pacing,
in which the terminal uses the ASCII control codes XON (%)
and XOFF (9) to start and stop the host computer from
transmitting. Note that a single XON code cancels any num-
ber of XOFF codes.
The terminal can also participate in an ENQ/ACK hand-
shake (which is a Hewlett-Packard handshaking
mechanism). With this form of handshaking, the host com-
puter transmits a block of data and then sends an ASCII
<ENG> control code. The terminal responds to the <ENQ> by
sending back an ASCII <ACK> control code when it has
processed all of the data preceding the <ENQ>. The general
interpretation of these two control codes is as follows:
ENQ:
ACK:
“Have you processed the data up to this point?”
“Yes, I have.”
The above pacing mechanisms are responded to by the
terminal in the following order of precedence:
1. Hardware handshaking pacing (highest priority)
2. XON/XOFF transmit pacing
3. XON/XOFF receive pacing
4. ENQ/ACK pacing (lowest priority)
SECTION
Vil
Status
INTRODUCTION
This section tells how a program executing in a host com-
puter obtains and interprets status information from the
terminal.
Status requests are issued in the form of escape sequences.
от Ло. 1
There are five types of status requests:
1. Terminal ID Status. This request is the means by which
your program verifies what kind of terminal it is com-
municating with.
2. Primary Terminal Status. This request returns seven
bytes that report the status of some of the latching keys,
various error and pending flags, and the following con-
figuration menu fields (see Section II, table 2-1 for
descriptions of the fields):
Xmit Fnctn Esc Xfer
SPOW Compat
InhEol Wrp
Line/Page
Inh Hndshk
Inh DC2
3. Secondary Terminal Status. This request returns seven
bytes that report the status of the memory lock, buffer
memory, and I/O firmware.
4. Device Status. This request returns three bytes that
report the status of the integral printer (and the exter-
nal device on the HP 2623A).
5. Graphics Status. These requests apply to the HP 2623A
Graphics Terminal. There are 12 graphics status re-
quests that can be made; they are listed in table 7-2.
The escape sequence used for each of the above requests and
the format of the returned status information is presented
in the following paragraphs.
All status requests are treated as block transfers. In
response to a status request, the terminal transmits an
escape sequence, followed by a series of bytes, followed by a
terminator. The terminator is as follows:
Character Mode: %or%'s
Block Line Mode: % or k*r
Block Page Mode: <BlkTermnator>
In either character mode or block line mode, the R*r is used
if auto line feed mode is enabled. In block page mode, the
block terminator is <Blk Termnator> (%).
The type of handshaking used is determined by the setting
of the InhHndShk and Inh % fields of the configuration
menu as follows:
1. InhHndShkCG) =YES No handshake
Inh DC2 CH) = YES
2. InhHndShk(G) =NO D,
Inh DC2CH) = YES or NO
3. InhHndShkCG? =YES 0, /0, /D
Inh DC2CH) = NO
For situation 1 above (no handshake), if data is entered
from the keyboard while the terminal is responding to a
status request, the data is stored by the terminal, then
transmitted after the status request response is completed.
For situation 2, the keyboard is locked, while the terminal
responds to a status request, until the computer sends the
DC1 which triggers the status response from the terminal.
Then the terminal sends the status, followed by any data
input from the keyboard.
For situation 3, events are the same as for situation 2, ex-
cept that after the computer sends the first DC1, the ter-
minal responds with a DC2, the computer sends a second
DC1, then the terminal sends the status and any keyboard
data. The keyboard is locked until the second DC1 is
received from the computer.
INTERPRETING STATUS
For primary, secondary, and device status requests, the
terminal returns an escape sequence followed by a string of
bytes. The status information is contained in the lower four
bits of each byte. The upper four bits are set so that the byte
translates into one of the 16 ASCII characters shown in
table 7-1.
For a terminal ID request, the terminal returns the 5-
character ASCII string “2622A” or “2623 A”.
Terminal ID Status
You request the terminal ID status by issuing the following
escape sequence:
Es 1
The terminal responds by sending back the following five-
character string:
2022
or
2623A
7-1
Status
Table 7-1. ASCII Status Characters
ASCII CHARACTER BINARY
0011 0000
0011 0001
0011 0010
0011 0011
0011 0100
0011 0101
0011 0110
0011 0111
0011 1000
0011 1001
0011 1010
0011 1011
0m “4 Or A с) го — ©
0011 1100
0011 1101
0011 1110
0011 1111
> V 1! A
Terminal Status
Terminal status is made up of 14 status bytes (bytes 0-13)
containing information such as display memory size,
switch settings, configuration menu settings, and termi-
nal errors. These 14 status bytes are displayed below the
self-test screen pattern when the “TERMINAL TEST” ( )
key (in the “service keys” set of function keys) is pressed.
There are two terminal status requests: primary and sec-
ondary. Each returns a set of 7 status bytes.
PRIMARY TERMINAL STATUS. You request the first
set of terminal status bytes (bytes 0-6) by issuing the
following escape sequence:
En
The terminal responds with an &\, and seven status bytes
followed by a terminator. A typical primary terminal
status request and response is illustrated in figure 7-1. The
example assumes that the ®, handshake is being used and
that the appropriate terminator is a %.
SECONDARY TERMINAL STATUS. You request the
second set of terminal status bytes (bytes 7-13) by issuing
the following escape sequence:
En
The terminal responds with an %I, and seven status bytes
followed by a terminator. A typical secondary terminal
status request and response is illustrated in figure 7-2. The
example assumes that the? handshake is being used and
that the appropriate terminator is a %.
COMPUTER
ESC / DC1
TERMINAL
ESC \ 4007420 CR
ie]
BYTE ASCII BINARY
Er Emp 01 00
1 ) №
, 0000
3 7
, 0100
, 0010
0000
Byte 0 Byte 6
Function key transmission disabled |
| ——— Space overwrite latch disabled
Cursor wraparound disabled
Strapped for line
| lL — Disable handshake
Inhibit DC2 disabled
1111——— Upper case only
| L———— Block mode
Auto line feed
Terminal sends secondary status
STATUS
LL 4K bytes of display memory (2 pages of 24 lines)
Configuration
Straps A-H
——— ENTER key has been hit
No data comm errors
| | | аз! Self-Test ok
No device errors (no integral printer error)
No devise status pending
No device operation status pending
Figure 7-1. Primary Terminal Status Example
7-2
Status
PRIMARY STATUS BYTES
BYTE 0 DISPLAY MEMORY SIZE BYTE 3 LATCHING KEYS
3/2/1
7 1/0|1/0/1/0
1K bytes
2K bytes Terminal sends
secondary status CAPS LOCK Key
4K bytes ! upper case only —
0 upper and lower case
8K bytes
AUTO LF Key = =—— BLOCK MODE Key
1 = auto LF 1 block mode
0 = no auto LF 0 character mode
This byte specifies the amount of display memory available in the terminal.
Note that the HP 2622A and HP 2623A terminals always return 4K bytes.
BYTE 1 CONFIGURATION STRAPS A-D
BYTE 4 TRANSFER PENDING FLAGS
3 |2 |1
1
1/011/0:1/0
| 1/0
svapD —— | Sap A SL
Page/Line | (Function Key Transmission) Secondary Status Pending — | | Cursor Sense Pending
2 _ 1 yes 1 yes
1 = Page | 1 = yes (Transmitted) О no 0 no
0 = Line | 0 = no (Not transmitted)
ENTER Key P . F
Strap C ——— Strap B 1 yes ey “encina es <ey Fenang
(Inhibit End-of-Line Wraparound) (Space Overwrite Latch) 0 no 0 no
1 = yes (Enabled) 1 = yes (Enabled)
0 = no (Disabled) 0 = no (Disabled)
Refer to Section It for a detailed description of configuration straps A-D.
BYTE 2 CONFIGURATION STRAPS E-H BYTES ERROR FLAGS
43121 31211
+ 11/01/01 0 | O ‚ 0 |1/0|1/0
Strap H (intubit DC2) a | Strap E Device Error | | Data Comm
: - yes [enabled (Integral Printer Error) 1 parity or buffer
= no (Disabled) Е 1 error (last print operation overflow error or
Strap G (DC2 Handshake) Strap or printer test failed) framing overrun error
1 = yes (Enabled) О no error 0 no error
0 = no (Disabled)
Refer to Section II for a detailed description of configuration straps G and H —— Self-Test
(straps E and F do not apply to the terminal). 9 no error
error
BYTE 6 DEVICE TRANSFER PENDING FLAGS
4 | 3211
O1 01011 0
Lb
— L Device Status Pending (&p*)
1 yes
0 no
Device Operation Status
Pending
1 yes
0 no
(tracks “S”, “F'", or “U" completion codes associated with T&p device
controi sequences.)
Status
COMPUTER TERMINAL
ESC — DC1
ESC | 0500002 CR
“li
tod
Byte 7 Byte 13
BYTE ASCII BINARY STATUS
7 0 Ч 0000
8 5 210100 — I/O firmware installed
"bee Terminal identifies self
9 0 0000
10 0 0000 —— Do not send escape codes to printer
Compatibility Mode off (2623A)
11 0 0000
12 0 0000
13 2 0010
L-—… Memory locked
Figure 7-2. Secondary Terminal Status Example
7-4
Status
SECONDARY STATUS BYTES
BYTE 7
BUFFER MEMORY
(always zero)
1K bytes
2K bytes
4K bytes
8K bytes
Memory installed in addition to display memory that is available for use as
data buffers. Note that the HP 2622A and HP 2623A terminals always return
a 0 value.
BYTE 8 TERMINAL FIRMWARE CONFIGURATION
31211
17011
о = Non-programmable | LL 1 = 1/0 firmware installed, integral
terminal printer (Option 50) present
1 = Terminal 0 = No APL Firmware
identifies
self
APL Firmware does not apply. Note that the HP 2622A returns either a4 or a
5; the HP 2623A always returns a 5.
BYTE 9 CONFIGURATION STRAPS J-M
(always zero)
2 |1
010
| 10
Strap M |
| Strap J (Auto Terminate)
1 = yes (Enabled)
0 = no (Disabled)
_ Strap K (Clear Terminator)
1 = yes (Enabled)
0 = no (Disabled)
Strap L (Self-Test inhibit)
1 = yes (Inhibit test)
О = no (Allow test)
Straps J-M do not apply to the terminal.
BYTE 13
MEMORY LOCK MODE
BYTE 10 KEYBOARD INTERFACE KEYS (N-R)
4|3[|2j1
. 0 | 1/0|1/0|1/0
Switch R | L switch N Printer (Escape
Q|P Code Transfer)
1 = open (Send ESC code)
0 | O Compatibility Mode off 0 = closed (Do not send code)
0 | 1 Scaled Compatibility ВО
mode Switch P Compatibility
1 | 0 Unscaled Compatibility Mode (Scaled)
mode 1 = Enabled
1{ 1 Compatibility Mode off 0 = Disabled
Switch Q Compatibility
Mode (Unscaled)
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
Straps N-R do not apply to the HP 2622A terminal.
BYTE 11 CONFIGURATION STRAPS $-\
(always zero)
1
Strap V | || Strap S
Strap U Strap T
Straps S-V do not apply to the teminal.
BYTE 12 CONFIGURATION STRAPS W-Z
(always zero)
1
О [0 |0
| Strap W (Data Comm Test)
1 = yes (Inhibit)
0 = no (Allow)
Strap X
Straps W, X, Y, and Z do not apply to the terminal.
1 = locked in row + 0
0 = locked in row 0 (memory overflow protect)
1 = memory lock on
0 = memory lock off
1 = memory full only active when memory
0 = memory not full } lock is enabled
7-5
Status
DEVICE STATUS
The following information on device status only applies
when option 050 (the integral printer) is installed and the
external device port on the HP 2623A.
The status of the integral printer and external printer can
be obtained by issuing a device status request. This request
would typically be made following a print operation or
after examining bytes 5 and 6 of the primary status. The
device status bytes are shown in figure 7-3.
You request device status by issuing the following escape
sequence:
Sip ¢<device coder”
where <device code> is either 4 or 6. Both 4 and 6 are
interpreted as the integral printer on the 2622A. The exter-
nal printer is 4 on the 2623A. However, you may obtain
status of the integral printer by device code 4 if “INT”
(integral) is configured in the “Printer Code 4” field of the
External Drive Configuration Menu of the HP 2623A.
If <device code> is any value other than 4 or 6, the escape
sequence is ignored.
The terminal responds with the sequence T\p “device
code>, followed by three status bytes followed by a ter-
minator. A typical device status request and response are
illustrated in figure 7-4.
DEVICE STATUS BYTES
(Integral Printer)
BYTE 0
со
N
pr
Printer Error | | Last Print Command
1 = yes (out of paper or 1 = failed (tracks "F" parameter
printer bail open) of device operation status)
0 = no 0 = successful (tracks "S” parameter
of device operation status)
1
O | 0 11/0
|| 1 = printer busy
0 = printer not busy
Command Execution -
1 = last command performed
0 = last command interrupted
(tracks “U” parameter
of device operation status)
BYTE 2
2|1
1/0
|
— Printer Present (option 050)
| = yes
0 = no
DEVICE STATUS BYTES
(External Printer)
BYTE 0
211
1/0
| Last Print Command
1 = failed (tracks “F” parameter
of device operation status)
0 = successful {tracks "S" parameter
of device operation status)
BYTE 1
1
0
Command Execution Ш || Printer Busy
1 = last command performed 1 = device transfer in progress
0 = last command interrupted 0 = not busy
{tracks “U” parameter
of device operation status)
BYTE 2
Figure 7-3. Device Status Bytes
7-6
Status
COMPUTER
ESC & p6 A DCT
_ESC | p6 181 CR
—————— Last command performed
BYTE ASCII BINARY
0 1
1 8
|
2 1
LL Printer present
TERMINAL
EXTERNAL
PRINTER
(Used with
HP 2623A Oniy)
Figure 7-4. Device Status Example
HP 2623A GRAPHICS STATUS
In addition to normal HP 2623A terminal status you can
request graphics status information. All graphics status
requests are initiated by sending an € *s followed by a
single parameter (1 through 12) followed by a“. The single
parameter selects the particular status block desired. If an
invalid parameter is used, the terminal will simply return
its LD. (see Device I.D. Request, parameter = 1).
Graphics Status
Request:
| 5 * 5 <parameter> “|
where: & * s is the graphics status escape sequence.
<parameter) is 1-12 and selects one of twelve
blocks of graphics status infor-
mation.
The graphics status blocks that can be requested are listed
in table 7-2 together with the format of ther terminal’s
response. Detailed descriptions of each of the status re-
quests are contained in the following paragraphs.
The terminal will respond with one or more bytes of status
information followed by a block terminator. All status
information is returned in ASCII format, separated by
commas. Coordinates are returned in a fixed format, con-
sisting of a sign and five digits. Leading zeros are used as
required to provide a fixed number of digits (i.e. +00100,
—01234). This allows you to use simple input statements
without the need to mask or shift bits.
If the DC1 handshake protocol is enabled (i.e., “NO” is
entered in the “InhHndShk (G)” and “Inh DC2(H)” fields of
the Terminal Configuration menu—refer to Section II), the
status block is not actually sent until receipt of a DC1
character. If the DC1 character is used, only one status
request can be enabled while the terminal is waiting for a
DC1. When the DC1 is received, the last status block re-
quested will be sent.
While the terminal is waiting for the DC1, the Device
Status Pending bit is set (see byte 6 of the primary status
bytes on page 7-3).
The terminal's configuration determines the terminating
character sent following the status block (%, R-'r, or K)—
refer to page 7-1. Graphics status requests turn on an echo
suppress mode in the terminal. This prevents information
echoed back from the computer from being displayed on the
screen. Once a status block has been sent, characters
received by the terminal will not be displayed until one of
the following control characters is received: 2, k, R, € , %,'t,
FEE 4 With the exception of % and r the terminating
control code itself will be executed.
The terminal expects the status information to be echoed
and uses the terminating control character to turn off the
suppress echo mode. If the computer does not echo the
status back, a suitable control character must be returned
to the terminal to turn off the echo suppress mode.
The graphics status blocks that can be requested are shown
in table 7-2.
7-7
Status
Table 7-2. HP 2623A Graphics Status Requests
Parameter Request Response
1 Read device I.D. 2623A
2 Read current pen position <X>,<Y>,<PEN>
3 Read graphics cursor position <X>,<Y>
4 Read graphics cursor position with wait <X> , <Y >, <KEY>
5 Read display size <LLX> , <LLY> , CURX> , <URY> , <MIMIX> , <MMY>
6 Read device capabilities <b1>,<b2>,. .<b15>,<b15>
7 Read graphics text status <Xsize>,<Ysize>,<origin>,<angle>,<slant>
8 Read zoom status 001.,0
9 Read relocatable origin <X>,<Y>
10 Read Reset status <RESET>, <b1>. . <b6> , <b7>
11 Read area shading capability 1,8,8
12 Read dynamics capability 1,1
Read Device 1.D. (Parameter=1)
When you request a device I.D. the terminal responds with
its Hewlett-Packard model number, 2623A.
The terminal responds: 2623A <terminator>
Device LD.
Request:
Read Current Pen Position (Parameter=2)
The pen position and status are returned as a string of
ASCII characters.
| с + < 2 ^ |
<X>,<Y>, <Pen>, <terminator>
Pen Position
Request:
The terminal responds:
||
where: <X> X coordinate
<Y> = Y coordinate
<Pen> = Pen state, 0=pen up, 1=pen down
For example, assume that the pen is at 360, 80, the pen is
up, and the terminal is set for the DC1 handshake, with
CR as the terminator;
& # 5s 2 » ¢terminator> DCi
N state
+00360,+00080,0%
The computer sends:
N coordinate
The terminal responds:
Y coordinate
Read Graphics Cursor Position
(Parameter=3)
The graphics cursor position is returned as a string of
ASCII characters.
<X>,<Y> <terminator>
Read Graphics
Cursor Request:
The terminal responds:
X coordinate
Y coordinate
where: <X>
<Y>
i
Read Cursor Position with Wait
(Parameter=4)
This request allows the user to position the cursor, then
strike a key to return the position. The ASCII decimal
code for the key struck is also returned (not the actual
character). The code is returned as three digits. For exam-
ple, striking an uppercase A would return 065. Only
ASCII character keys will generate a response (i.e. ROLL
UP, ROLL DOWN, etc. are ignored). The graphics cursor
is turned on, if not already on. If an escape sequence is
received by the terminal after it has received the READ
CURSOR with WAIT command and before a key is struck,
the READ CURSOR command will be aborted. The new
sequence will be executed instead.
Read Graphics Cursor
with Wait Request:
The terminal responds: <X>,«Y>,<key code>
terminator)
where: + X coordinate
<Y> Y coordinate
<key code> = Decimal value of key struck
The position bytes are ordered as in the read pen request.
The decimal of ASCII characters are given in ASCII charac-
ter set tables in Appendix B.
Read Display Size
(Parameter=5)
This request returns the number of displayable units in
the X and Y axes. It also returns the number of units per
millimeter in the display. This request allows you to scale
data for use on graphic devices with varying display areas.
The terminal responds: <LLX>,<LLY>,<URX>,<URY>,
<MMX> , <MMY><terminator>
Read Display
Size Request:
where: <LLX>,<URX> = Lower left and upper right x
coordinates
«LLY>,<URY> = Lower left and upper right y
coordinates
<MMX>,<MMY> = number of units per millimeter
in the x and y axes, (five digits
and a decimal point)
The terminal will always return a fixed response. The
lower left corner has coordinates of 0,0. The upper right
corner has coordinates of 511,389. There are approximately
2 units per millimeter in each axis.
Terminal response: +00000,+00000,+00511,+00389,
00002.,00002.<terminator>
Read Device Capabilities (Parameter=6)
The device capabilities request returns a list of graphic
and plotting features available in the terminal. This al-
lows you to use one program for a variety of graphic
devices. Not all of the features listed are available in the
terminal. The absence of a feature is indicated by a 0. If a
feature is present, it may be necessary to send an addi-
tional request to determine the exact capabilities present.
Where multiple response values are possible the termi-
nal’s standard response is shaded.
L 4]
Device Capability
Request:
The terminal responds:
<b1>,<b2>,<b3>,<b4>,<b5>,<b6>,<b7>,
<b8> ,<b9>,<b10>,<b11>,<b12>,<b13>,<b14>,
<b15>, <b16><terminator>
Status
where: <b1> = Clear Display
0 = noclear
paper advance
clear (total erase)
vv vi
<b2> = Number of Pens (1)
<b3>,<b4> = Not Used (0,0)
<b5> = Area Shading
0 —
<b6> ,<b7> = Not Used (0,0)
<b8> = Dynamic Modification
<b9> = Graphics Character Size
= fixed
2 any size
<b10> = Graphics Character Angles
0 = fixed
2 multiples of 45°
3 = any angle
<b11> = Graphics Character Slant
fixed
<b12> =
<b13>-<b16> = Not Used (0,0,0,0)
The terminal will always respond:
3,1,0,0,1,0,0,1,1,1,1,2,0,0,0,0<terminator>
Read Graphics Text Status
(Parameter=7)
The terminal returns the current text size, orientation,
slant, and type of justification. Refer to Section X,
Graphics Control Functions for a description of graphics
text characteristics.
Read Graphics
Text Request:
The terminal returns: <x size>,<Y size>,<origin>,
<angle>,<slant><terminator>
where: <X size> = X dimension of the character cell
(sign + 5 digits)
<Y size> = Y dimension of the character cell
(sign + 5 digits)
7-9
Status
<origin> = Relative position of text to cursor
(see text origin command) (1 digit)
<angle> = Text angle 0, 90, 180, or 270 (five
digits and a decimal point)
<slant> = 00000. or 00045. degrees
Example terminal response:
+00007,+00010,1 <terminator>
Read Zoom Status (Parameter=8)
This request returns the zoom setting. Since the HP 2623A
terminal does not have the zoom feature, it always returns
constant values.
Read Zoom
Status Request:
The terminal responds:
<zoomsize>,<zZoomon/off><terminator>
<zoom 5ize> = 001.
<zoom on/off> = 0 for Off
where:
Read Relocatable Origin
(Parameter=9)
The position of the relocatable origin is returned as x and
y coordinates.
| 5 #5 9° |
The terminal responds:
<X coordinate>,<Y coordinate><terminator>
Read Relocatable
Origin Request:
Example terminal response:
+00000,+00000 <terminator>
Read Reset Status
(Parameter=10)
You can determine whether or not the terminal has exe-
cuted a full reset (or Power On) since the last time reset
status was checked. This will tell you whether or not you
need to reestablish terminal settings or images before
resuming terminal functions. An additional seven bytes
are returned but are not used.
7-10
Read Reset
Status Request:
The terminal responds: <reset>,<b1>,<b>2>,
<b3>,<b4>,<b5>, <b6>,
<b7><terminator>
where: <reset status> = 0 No full reset since last
check
or
1 Terminal has been reset
<b1>-<b7> = 0 (not used)
Read Area Shading Capability
(Parameter=11)
The area shading capability of the terminal can be read.
These are fixed for the terminal.
Read Area
Shading Request:
The terminal will always respond: 1,8,8 <terminator>
The “1” indicates that the area shaded must be rectangu-
lar. The first “8” indicates that the shading pattern is 8
units wide. The second “8” indicates that the shading
pattern 1s 8 units high.
Read Graphic Modification
Capabilities (Parameter=12)
You can read the terminal’s dynamic graphics
capabilities. This is the ability of the terminal to change
selected portions of the display. These are fixed for the
terminal.
Read Graphic Modification
Capabilities Request:
The terminal will always respond: 1,1 <terminator>
These two bytes indicate that the terminal has selective
erase and compliment capabilities.
Any Other Parameter
Any other parameter which has not been assigned causes
the terminal I.D. to be returned. This is to prevent an
invalid status request from tying up the requesting com-
puter while waiting for a response.
2623A terminator?
Error Messages and Self-Test
SECTION
VIII
INTRODUCTION
This section is divided into two portions. The first discusses
the various error messages that may appear on the termi-
nal’s screen while you are attempting to perform opera-
tions through the keyboard. The second discusses the
various types of self-tests that are incorporated into the
terminal.
ERROR MESSAGES
When the terminal detects a parameter inconsistency or
error condition, it locks the keyboard and displays an ap-
propriate error message across the bottom of the screen
(replacing the function key labels). Press to unlock
the keyboard, clear the message, and reinstate the current
function key labels.
The various possible error messages and their general
meanings are as follow:
Default configs used
Press RETURN toclear
This message is displayed when the terminal attempts
to read the content of non-volatile memory but detects
a CRC error (e.g., at power-on time, during a hard
reset).
To determine whether the problem is a bad battery or a
bad RAM chip, run the Terminal Test described later in
this section. If the RAM chip used for non-volatile
memory is bad, the Terminal Test will fail and
generate an appropriate “CMOS RAM” message identify-
ing the faulty chip. If the test passes, then the
“default configs used” power-on message indicates
that the battery needs to be changed. Instructions on
how to change the battery are provided in Section IX,
“Terminal Maintenance Procedures”.
After clearing the message (by pressing (ED), you
may then reconfigure the terminal as you desire.
Integral printer error
Press RETURN toclear
Something is wrong with the integral printer. It may
just be out of paper or the metal latch (under the
plastic printer lid) may not be pressed down securely.
No ‘TO’ device
You attempted to initiate a device control data trans-
fer (copy line, copy page, copy all) but no destination
device is currently defined. Press (ED, use the
“device control” set of function keys to define an
external printer and/or the integral printer as the “to”
device, and then retry the copy operation.
TERMINAL SELF-TESTS
The terminal includes six types of self-tests:
e Power-On Test
Manufacturing Test
Terminal Test
Identify ROMs
Datacomm Test
Internal Printer Test
The Power-On Test is automatically initiated as the result
of a power-on sequence. All of the other tests must be
initiated using the “service keys” (except the Terminal
Test, which can also be initiated programmatically or by
using a “MODES” function key).
Power-On Test
The Power-On Test, which is performed automatically
whenever you turn on the terminal's power, does the
following:
1. Tests the processor and verifies the integrity of all ROM
(Read-Only Memory) and RAM (Random-Access
Memory) chips within the terminal.
If the Power-On Test results are normal:
1. at power on, the terminal beeps once,
2. does the test for about 15 seconds,
3. beeps once again,
4. brings up the MODES group of softkey labels on the ter-
minal screen.
If an error is found, one of the following will occur when the
terminal is turned on:
a. The terminal will fail to beep at all.
b. The terminal will beep continuously.
After the first beep, the terminal will beep 1 to 14 times
and no softkey labels will appear on the screen.
e
If the terminal fails to beep, check to make sure the
keyboard is connected properly; andiry again. If the prob-
lem persists, call the nearest HP Sales and Service Office
and arrange to have the terminal repaired.
If one of the other error conditions occur (beeping too many
times), also call the nearest HP Sales and Service Office
and arrange to have the terminal repaired.
8-1
Error Messages and Self-Test
Terminal Test
This test does the following:
1. Performs a graphics test on the 2623A. The test checks
both the vector generating function as well as the
graphics memory. If this test fails, a message indicating
the failing component may be displayed. The display
shows two patterns:
The first:
Е
ap
The second;
2. Displays the message “TESTING” at the bottom of the
screen (on the same line where the function key labels
normally appear).
3. Verifies the integrity of all firmware ROM chips within
the terminal.
4. Non-destructively verifies the integrity of all RAM
chips within the terminal (including the one used for
non-volatile memory).
5. Displays the test pattern shown in figure 8-1 or 8-2
(depending on whether you have the optional Line
Drawing or National character sets).
To initiate the Terminal Test press the following keys in the
sequence shown:
[#3] [FS]
(AINSI service TERMINA
keys TEST
or
[+51
[MODES]
TERMINAL
IG
If a ROM error is detected, the following message is dis-
played across the bottom of the screen:
ROM ERR #x
Press RETURN toclear
where “x” will be a number from 1 to 6. This message
contains information identifying the bad ROM chip(s) and
describing the nature of the detected error condition. In
such a case, or for any other error message, write down the
message so you can relate it accurately to your HP Service
Representative over the telephone (this allows him to ar-
rive prepared with the proper replacement parts).
If a RAM error is detected, the following message is dis-
played across the bottom of the screen:
RAM ERR #x
Press RETURNtoclear
where “x” is 1 to 8. This message also contains information
identifying the bad RAM chip(s) and describing the nature
of the detected error condition. Write down the message
and call your nearest HP Service Representative.
NSSE EEAQBHLY FCSSDDbDD DNSECESE FG
UEXX JOEYSTEFT FROIL123 4kVBERMBE | ЕЕ
déoû a93e00383e200 аёбоАТИЙЕ 3SiegzÄäi00 EI
L DNSECESE F
F 4 K Y BNMEC E
fi TUVIXYZE À
Ue SA ()*+
_— abc defghi jk
7 A "" ha £ *
eNMI¿0OE 8
,—./0123
lmnopars
456739: <=>?
tuvwxyzl 13-й
CSSDDDD DNSECESE FGR
FROILA123 4+4K7BMMEC 555
déoUôiff Jdisxlil0 EIR
FESSDIUDOD DNSECESE F GR
FROTL 123 à k ŸYEHNHEBÉ Зо
wd [pd 1H ds -À-
FCSSDDDD DNSECESE FOR
FROTITL 123 4KYENMEBEO 5Ec
LMNOPURS TUVHXYZ[ A
4008020 0500000
Ha a AT ha A
abc defghi jk
САМОЕ $
ЗЛА’ ()*+ ,-./0123
imnopars
456789:; <=>7
tuvwxyz{ 124
Figure 8-2. Screen Test Pattern, Option 202 (Line Drawing Character Set)
8-2
If the ROM and RAM chips all pass the test but the test
pattern on the screen is malformed, then this would sug-
gest a problem with the video portion of the terminal (the
==. ie
sweep mechanism, the yoke alignment, and so forth).
identify ROMS
To generate a descriptive list of all ROM chips installed in
the terminal, press the following keys in the order shown:
[43] [+6]
service
keys
[AIDS]
IDENTIF
LTS
A list similar to the one shown in figure 8-3 is displayed on
the screen.
Datacomm Test
The data communications (datacomm) self-test checks the
50-pin port at the rear of the terminal. It also checks the
25-pin external peripheral port of the HP 2623A.
To enable the data communications (datacomm) self-test
press the following keys in the sequence shown:
[+3] [£71
service ОВТАСОМ
keys TEST
Test hood (HP part no. 02620-60056) must be connected to
the 50-pin datacomm port, and test hood (part no. 02620-
60062) must be connected to the 25-pin external peripheral
port (HP 2623 A only) to perform the datacomm test. Other-
wise, “Datacomm Error 1” will appear on the screen if the
test is attempted without them being connected.
[AIDS]
Data Communications Test Hoods
Part No. Description
02620-60056 This is a male 50-pin test hood for use on the
datacomm port on both the HP 2622A and HP
2623A terminals.
This is a male RS-232C test hood for use on
the external peripheral port on the HP 2623A
terminal.
02620-60062
HP 2622A HP 2623A
Firmware ROMs Firmware ROMs
1818-1640 2129
1818-1455 2129
1818-1454 2129
1818-1641 2129
1818-1781 2129
1818-1685 2123
1818-1686 2123
1818-1687 2123
1818-1688 2123
Figure 8-3. ROM Identification Listing
Error Messages and Self-Test
These test hoods are available as a set which can be ordered
separately as the HP 13259A Data Comm Self-Test Con-
nector Kit.
The loopback test consists of a data loopback operation
(which checks to see if the character sent is the same as the
character received), a baud rate test (which verifies that
the baud rate mechanism is functioning properly within
+ 2% of the configured baud rate), and a modem control line
test.
While the test is executing, “Testing” is displayed on the
terminal screen. If no errors are found, the terminal beeps
and displays the softkeys. If an error is found, an error
nd di s th ys. Tf error
message will appear on the terminal screen, similar to a
ROM error.
The “Err *” field contains a numeric error code which is
interpreted as follows:
1 = Test connector not present
2 = Baud rate too fast
3 = Baud rate too slow
4 = Error in Control lines
5 = Character did not loop back
6 = Received character NOT same as one trans-
mitted
7 = Framing error in character
8 = A character was overrun
Printer Test
The Printer Test, which is usable only if the optional inte-
gral printer is present, exercises all the features of the
integral printer to verify that it is functioning properly. To
initiate this test press the following keys in the sequence
shown:
[+3] [+6]
service NT PRT
keys TEST
If the printer is functioning properly it generates the test
pattern shown in figure 8-4.
Note that if your terminal does NOT include the integral
printer the key label in the “service keys” set of
function keys will be blank and pressing that key will have
no effect.
If an error condition is detected while the test is being
executed, the message ee еее ен)
INTEGRAL PRINTER ERROR
Press RETURN to clear
appears across the bottom of the screen. To clear the mes-
sage, press (MB. Note that the error condition may be
8-3
Error Messages and Self-Test
SABEC DEFGEIJK LPNCPORS TUVMXYZ[ \3%_ ‘abc detghijk Imnopgrs tuvwxyz{ 130
ABC DEF GHI JK LMNOPGUGRS TUCVLIXYZE NI _
WC ESFPIK LPS TOD NA ‘ac defbi;k lwopgs toweyz{ IH 5% 71)», -./0174 5070: =>
GREC DEFG efBC _DEFG PAEC DEFQ
Figure 8-4. Integral Printer Self-Test Output
either of the following, in which case you could correct it 2. The metal latch (under the plastic printer lid) is not
yourself: pressed down securely.
If the error is not due to one of these conditions, call your
1. Out of paper. nearest HP Service Representative.
8-4
Terminal Maintenance Procedures
SECTION
INTRODUCTION
This section provides information on preventive mainte-
nance for your terminal, such as cleaning the screen and
keyboard; and routine maintenance such as replacing
paper in the integral printer.
CLEANING THE
SCREEN AND KEYBOARD
The display screen and the keyboard should be cleaned
regularly to remove dust and grease. First, lightly dust the
entire terminal using a damp, lint-free cloth or paper
towel. The cloth or paper towel should be damp enough to
pick up any dust, but should not be wet. Avoid wiping dust
or lint into the key area of the keyboard.
Greasy smudges and fingerprints can be removed using
most conventional spray cleaners. Avoid spraying between
the keys.
DO NOT use petroleum-based cleaners (such as lighter
fluid) or cleaners containing benzene, trichlorethylene,
ammonia, dilute ammonia, or acetone because these
chemicals could damage the terminal’s plastic surfaces.
BATTERY MAINTENANCE
The non-volatile portion of memory that contains the ter-
minal’s configuration data is protected against destruction
by a battery that is located just above the rear panel of your
terminal. Figure 9-1 shows the rear panel and the location
of the battery.
The battery requires no special care or maintenance. It
should, however, be replaced with a new battery every 12
months. You may purchase a replacement battery through
conventional retail stores. When doing so, request a Mal-
lory Battery, Type TR133. You may also order replacement
batteries through your local HP Sales and Service Office
using the following nomenclature and part number:
HP 2622A or HP 2623A Battery,
HP Part No. 1420-0259
If your terminal includes the optional thermal printer you
may wish to record the various configuration menus on
paper before removing the old battery. To do so, perform the
following:
1. Use the “config keys” set of function keys to display
the particular menu of the screen.
2. Press the key.
BATTERY CLIPS
Figure 9-1. Battery Location, Rear Panel
Terminal Maintenance Procedures
Replace the battery as follows:
1.
Grasp the battery support at points A and B as shown
in figure 9-2.
Squeeze the tabs at points A and B toward the center of
the battery support with enough pressure to disengage
the flanges that hold the battery support in place.
. Gently pull the support downward until it is com-
pletely free from the terminal housing.
. Remove the old battery from the support.
. Install the new battery in the support making sure
that the positive end of the battery matches the posi-
tive end of the support (+ to + and — to —).
. Reinsert the battery support into the terminal. À
slotted guide along one side of the battery support
ensures that the support is inserted correctly. The
slotted guide must be facing away from the terminal
case when you reinsert the support (otherwise the
support will not fit back into the terminal).
THERMAL PRINTER PAPER
The optional thermal printer mechanism uses a thermal
printing paper that is manufactured specifically for use by
the HP 262x family of terminals. You can purchase it
through your local HP Sales and Service Office using the
following nomenclature and HP part number:
1 Box (24 rolls) Thermal Paper, HP Part No. 9270-0638
It is recommended that you only use HP Thermal Paper in
your terminal. If you have an HP Warranty and Service
Contract, you MUST use only HP Thermal Paper in order
to maintain a valid contract. HP Warranty and Service
Contracts are available through your local HP Sales and
Service Office.
Figure 9-2. Removing the Battery
9-2
Paper Loading
The printer mechanism is shown in figure 9-3.
Load a roll of thermal paper into the printer as follows:
1.
oo
Lift the top cover of the printer mechanism. An il-
lustration of the correct paper position and flow is
embossed on the underside of this cover.
. Press the latch (figure 9-3) toward the front of the
terminal to release the latching frame. Lift the hinged
latching frame to its forward position.
. Remove any paper remaining in the printer.
. The center paper core is held in place by a metal rod
inserted through the center of the core. Grasp the core
and lift forward and upward along the guide slots to
remove the core and rod.
. Remove the rod from the old core and insert the rod
through the core of a new roll of paper.
The HP Thermal Paper is coated with print material on
one side and must be inserted into the printer correctly
to produce the print image. The paper must feed
toward the front of the terminal from the underside of
the paper roll (see the embossed illustration on the top
cover).
. Place the ends of the metal rod into the guide slots on
either side of the print mechanism and press
10.
11.
12.
13.
Terminal Maintenance Procedures
downward and then toward the back of the terminal
until the rod snaps into place.
. Feed the leading edge of the paper through the latch-
ing frame (between the latching frame and the clear
plastic guide window). Be careful not to sharply strike
the print head because damage may result.
. Lower the latching frame without locking it into place.
. Align the sides of the paper with the guide lines
embossed on each side of the guide window.
Each new roll of HP Thermal Paper has a glue spot
near the leading edge of the roll that holds the paper
wall intact during shipment Vai must nat allow +h
roll intact durin pment. You must not allow th
print head to come in contact with this glue spot.
Feed approximately 12 inches of paper through the
latching frame so that the glue spot is beyond (outside)
the print head and guide window.
Press the latch down until it locks into place with an
audible click.
Tear off the excess paper using the edge of the guide
window as a cutting edge.
Close the top cover securely and press 9.
Note that if subsequent printer operations produce no
image on the paper, the paper has probably been installed
with the wrong side facing the print head. An image can be
printed only on one side of HP Thermal Paper.
PLASTIC
GUIDE WINDOW
PRINT HEAD
LATCH
LATCHING FRAME
Figure 9-3. Printer Mechanism
9-3/9-4
Graphics Control Functions
SECTION
X
INTRODUCTION
This section contains a description of the terminal’s graph-
ics functions and how they are used. The information and
the examples are intended for use in developing programs
to control the graphics functions. Additional information
Lacs da A maniac fhnatimac Firmen tha Irachaand a
ON Now LO Usc LTC Srapnils ¡CaLUTES 1FOM спе KEYDOGarú 15
contained in the User's Manual.
GRAPHICS DISPLAY
You can display graphics data by addressing points in a 512
by 390 array.
Г D)
0,389 511,389
512 X 390
0,0 511,0
The graphics and alphanumeric data are displayed in the
same area on the screen but are stored in separate RAM
memories. This allows you to read or modify graphics and
alphanumeric data separately.
NOTE
Display enhancements (blinking, in-
verse video, half-bright, and underline)
will affect the display of graphics data.
The display enhancements affect al-
phanumeric character positions on the
screen. Since the graphics data 15 dis-
played using the same screen dots as
the alphanumeric data, it is also af-
fected by the enhancements. The data in
the graphics display memory is
unchanged.
Figure 10-1. Location of Graphics Keys
KEYBOARD GRAPHICS FUNCTIONS
All of the graphics functions commands can be entered
from the terminal keyboard by the operator. Some of the
functions are available through a special set of graphics
control keys located to the right of the normal ASCII
character set (see figure 10-1). Table 10-3 contains a list
of the keys and a description of their functions. The func-
tions performed by these keys can be used in both local
and remote operation. This allows a combination of
operator and program control of graphics functions to be
used to make maximum use of the terminal's capabilities.
Detailed information for using the graphics control keys
is contained in the User's Manual.
Each key (except the two TAB keys and the decimal point
key) performs two functions. The (73 key controls whether
or not the “10-key” pad performs the graphics functions
labeled on the keys or the numeric functions labeled in the
lower-left corner of each key. When the terminal is turned
on initially, or after a hard reset CES, the keypad
is in graphics mode. This means that the graphics functions
labeled on the keys are in effect. To change to the numeric
functions, press E. To change back to graphics func-
tions, press CI again. As you can see, (M toggles
the keypad functions between graphics and numerics. The
only graphics keys that repeat when held depressed are
those that control the graphics cursor. =~ —
When the keypad is in graphics mode, the minus function
on the ($, and the ED, ES, and ÆB keys are disabled.
10-1
Graphics Control Functions
Table 10-1. Graphics Control Keys
KEY DESCRIPTION
GRAPH Toggles the graphics cursor on and off.
CURSOR
ae Move the graphics cursor. More than one can
2e be pressed for diagonal motion.
CURSOR Speeds up the graphics cursor if pressed in
FAST conjunction with the cursor keys. The rate
returns to normal when released.
GRAPH Toggles the graphics display, to inhibit the
| DSPLY graphics image without erasing.
[ALPHA Toggles the alphanumeric displays.
| DSPLY
GRAPH Erases the graphics image memory.
(CLEAR
[GRAPH Copies graphics memory to the specified “to”
| COPY devices.
Toggles the function of the keypad between
graphics and numerics when EZ) is pressed
simultaneously.
ee
Unshifted in numeric mode, the key is used to
dispiay a dash (—) character.
PROGRAMMABLE
GRAPHICS FUNCTIONS
Graphics functions are controlled by parameterized escape
sequences. All graphics escape sequences begin with +.
The third character, always lower case, selects the type of
graphics sequence. Table 10-2 lists the types of graphics
sequences. For example, * p specifies a plotting sequence.
Subsequent characters in the control sequence are read as
either parameters or commands, depending on the loca-
tion of the character in the ASCII table.
Table 10-2. Summary of Graphics Sequence Types
ESCAPE SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION
d Display Control
1 Labeling
m Drawing Mode
Р Vector Plotting
s Graphics Status
t Compatibility Mode
RE PR
Li + * * + *
10-2
BIT
4321
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Parameters Commands
BIT 7654 321
00 Control Code
0 1 Parameter
10 Command and Terminate Sequence
11 Command and Continue Sequence
Control Codes
Control codes are generally ignored, with the exception of
the ESCAPE character (%). If an % character is detected
and the previous graphics control sequence has not been
properly terminated with a “Z” or some other valid upper
case character, the & will cause the execution of the previ-
ous sequence to be terminated. The new escape sequence
will then be executed.
Commands
Graphics commands come from columns 4-7 of the ASCII
table, the upper and lower case letters (A-Z and *). Both
upper and lower case commands execute the same function.
Upper case letters terminate the sequence and cause it to be
executed. You can use more than one command in a
sequence.
Graphics sequences can be any length. (The terminal ig-
nores CR and LF characters in the middle of graphics
sequences.) For example, to plot a figure containing 100
points the escape sequence could appear as follows:
5 * pa <x1,y1> . . <x100,y100>2
This could cause problems if an error occurs and the sys-
tem tries to report it in the middle of a long sequence.
Since most systems use upper case characters for mes-
sages, the first character of the message would end any
graphics sequence that might be in progress. Letters that
have not been assigned a function for a particular graphics
sequence are treated as NOPs and if they are lower case,
are ignored. If upper case, they will end the sequence. The
letter z has been defined as a NOP in all sequences so that
a capital Z can always be used to end a graphics escape
sequence.
Parameters
Parameters come from columns 2 and 3 of the ASCII table
(SPACE through ?). Most parameters are simply the
ASCII numeric characters used to represent data coordi-
nates or to select one of several settings. Binary formatted
data is generated by appending the bits 0 1 to five bits of
binary data. Note that in binary formats, spaces are
treated as data and are not ignored or used as delimiters.
Both ASCII and binary data formats are described later in
this section.
Parameters precede their associated commands (postfix
notation). The most frequently used parameters are vector
data. Refer to the discussion of Vectors for additional in-
formation on parameters used to define vector operations.
Examples:
A commands
% «+ m 2a 7b 256,195 J
—— \
preamble parameters
command end sequence
/ /
& + p f 100, 100, 200, 2002
> ли” Y ”
preamble parameters
The programmable graphics functions are organized into
five major groups.
® Graphics Display Control
o Plotting ~~
e Graphics Text
e Compatibility Mode
The remainder of this section contains descriptions of each
of these functional groups.
Graphics Control Functions
GRAPHICS DISPLAY CONTROL
Graphics display control is made up of the functions used
to control the graphics cursor, the portion of the graphics
memory that is currently being displayed, or the state of
the graphics memory. These functions are as follows:
e Graphics Cursor Control
e Graphics Memory Control
Table 10-3 lists the escape sequences for each of the graph-
ics display control functions.
Table 10-3. Graphics Display Control Functions
FUNCTION CODE DESCRIPTION
Graphics Cursor Control
Cursor On «dk Turn on the graphics cursor.
Cursor Off Er+d1l Turn off the graphics cursor.
Move Absolute | t*d<x ,y>o Position the graphics cursor.
Move Relative «dex, y>p Position the graphics cursor.
Graphics Memory Control
Clear Memory | &=*da
Set Memory E+db
Display On E+dc
Display Off E+dd
Turn off all dots in graphics memory.
Turn on all dots in graphics memory.
Enable the graphics display.
Inhibit the graphics display.
Graphics Cursor Control
A separate graphics cursor is available for use in locating
points in the graphics display. The graphics cursor is used
by the terminal operator to input position data or to inter-
act with a graphics application program.
GRAPHICS CURSOR ON/OFF. The graphics cursor is
initially off (power on or full reset). Turning the cursor on
or off does not effect the data in graphics memory.
The graphics cursor may be toggled on and off by pressing
the [GRAPH CURSOR] key on the graphics/numeric pad.
Programmatically, you can toggle the cursor:
Graphics Cursor On: Eck
Graphics Cursor Off: sd]
GRAPHICS CURSOR POSITIONING. The graphics
cursor is initially at position (0,0) after power on or a full
reset. The cursor can be positioned (even if it is not turned
on) using either absolute or relative coordinates. In the
following sequences X and Y give the new cursor position.
Refer to Vectors for a discussion of absolute and relative
coordinates.
10-3
Graphics Control Functions
Position Graphics
Cursor Absolute:
Position Graphics
Cursor Relative:
You may position the graphics cursor from the graph-
ics/numeric keypad by pressing EI, E, EB. or EB.
Pressing two keys simultaneously will cause diagonal
movement. The [CURSOR FAST] key may be pressed si-
multaneously to speed up cursor positioning.
Example: The cursor is currently at position 100,100 and
off. Move it 50 units to the right and 20 units down from
its current position and turn it on.
(BEFORE)
4 В
(190,109)
_ _
ESC * d 50 -20pl
(AFTER)
( N
— 50 —
x '
> -20
+ |
(150.80)
Graphics Memory Control
The graphics display can be turned on or off or the
entire memory can be set to all ones (dots on) or all
zeros (dots off).
GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON/OFF. The graphics display
and graphics cursor can be turned on or off. The data in
the graphics memory is unaffected.
From the graphics/numeric keypad, pressing [GRAPH
DSPLY] toggles the graphics display on and off:
Programmatically:
Graphics Display On:
Graphics Display Off:
GRAPHICS DISPLAY SET/CLEAR. The graphics data
currently displayed on the screen can be set to all ones (a
white screen) or cleared to all zeros (a black screen).
Clear Graphics Memory:
Set Graphics Memory:
You may clear graphics data on the screen from the
keyboard by pressing [GRAPH CLEAR] on the graph-
ics/numeric pad.
10-4
INSERTING DELAYS IN GRAPHICS
OPERATIONS
Certain graphics operations are executed only at the end
of a frame (drawing of the display). These operations take
approximately 16 ms and can be used as delays to slow
down or synchronize changes in the display.
OPERATION CODE
Graphics Display On rade
Graphics Display Off add
Alphanumeric Display On ode
Alphanumeric Display Off „ат
GRAPHICS DRAWING MODE
PARAMETERS
There are several drawing parameters that can be set to
allow a wide variety of drawing capabilities. These pa-
rameters select whether data will be stored in the graphics
memory as l’s or 0's, define line or area patterns to be used
when drawing vectors, position the relocatable origin, and
define graphics text settings.
Graphics drawing control sequences begin with& * m fol-
lowed by one or more of the drawing parameters. Table 10-4
lists the mode control commands.
Drawing Modes
Vectors can be drawn by setting, clearing, or complement-
ing the data in the graphics memory. Normally the mem-
ory 1s cleared and vectors are drawn by setting selected
bits to make white lines on a dark screen. If instead you
want black vectors on a white screen, you can begin by
setting memory (refer to the Set Memory command), select
a clear or complement line type and draw dark vectors
(refer to the example that follows). Figure 10-2 illustrates
the various drawing modes.
Table 10-4. Graphics Mode Commands
“© + m <parameters>
DESCRIPTION
select drawing mode
select line type
define line pattern
define area pattern
area fill, absolute
area fill, relocatable
set relocatable origin
set relocatable origin to current pen
position |
set relocatable origin to cursor position
set graphics text size
set graphics text direction
turn on charcter slant
turn off character slant
set text origin
set graphics defaults
NOP
PARAMETERS
A — -- 00 OOO TD
N “OT O03 3 —
Graphics Control Functions
DRAWING DATA SCREEN
DRAWING
MODES
N — N
MODE=0 (NO EFFECT)
(
MODE=1 (CLEAR) MODE=2 (SET)
DRA
MO
MODE=3 (COMPLEMENT) MODE=4 (JAM)
DRA
MO
JL
Figure 10-2. Examples of Drawing Modes
10-5
Graphics Control Functions
Set Drawing Mode: © * m “parameter> a
where: <parameter> 15
1 Clear (turn off graphics bits).
2 Set (turn on graphics bits).
3 Complement (toggle the graphics bits).
4 Jam (turn bits on or off according to the
data).
CLEAR MODE. Clear mode causes selected display bits
to be turned off. The “selected bits” are those that are “on”
in the line pattern. If a solid line type (the default) has
been selected, all of the bits in a vector will be selected. In
clear mode this means that all of the dots making up a
vector will be turned off. This allows you to draw dark
vectors on a white background. Only those bits that are on
in the pattern are cleared. Bits that are off in the pattern
do not affect the display.
SET MODE. Set mode is similar to clear mode except
that the selected bits are turned on instead of otf. Only the
bits that are on in the line type are affected.
COMPLEMENT MODE. Complement mode causes the
selected display bits to change state (on to off, off to on).
Again only those bits that are on in the line type or
pattern are affected.
JAM MODE. Jam mode differs from the other modes in
that both the bits that are on in the line type or pattern
and the bits in the pattern that are off affect the display.
Jam mode has the effect of overlaying the display with the
pattern.
Selective Erase. A vector drawn in set mode can be
selectively erased by redrawing it in clear mode. This will
cause gaps to occur if the erased line is intersected by
other lines. This problem can be overcome by initially
drawing the line in complement mode and then redrawing
it in complement mode to erase the line. This technique
will preserve the original display. Complement mode is
useful for drawing and erasing temporary figures.
Example: Select complement mode, draw a vector, and
then erase the vector by redrawing.
E *m 38 (select complement mode)
& + ра f 100,300 300,300Z
с + p a f 100,300 300,300Z
(draw vector)
(erase vector)
Drawing Patterns
You can select the dot pattern used when drawing vectors
or filling rectangular areas. Dotted and dashed lines can
be drawn bv selecting one of nine predefined line patterns
or a user defined line or area pattern. This allows vou to
10-6
use different line patterns to distinguish between groups
of plotted data or easily generate shading and cross hatch-
ing for use in engineering drawings, graphs or fabric pat-
terns.
LINE TYPE. One of eleven line types can be selected.
Once a line type has been selected, all drawing vectors are
drawn using that line type. The patterns for the predefined
line types are shown in figure 10-3. Refer to the Define Line
Pattern command for additional information.
Select Line Type:
where: <line type> is
Solid line (default)
User defined line pattern
User defined area pattern
Predefined pattern #1
Predefined pattern #2
Predefined pattern #3
Predefined pattern #4
Predefined pattern #5
Predefined pattern #6
Predefined pattern #7
Point plot
— OO 010d WN =
bd fod
Point plot causes a single point to be plotted at the coordi-
nates specified by the data. This line type is useful for
generating “scattergram” type graphs. If user defined area
shading is selected (type = 3) the line patterns used are
selected from the eight lines making up the area fill pat-
tern (refer to Define Area Pattern). The display is divided
into groups of eight rows and eight columns. Horizontal
and vertical lines are drawn using the appropriate row or
column from the area pattern. Diagonal lines are drawn
using a solid vector.
—
ий.
u
> (POINT PLOT)
Figure 10-3. Predefined Line Type Patterns
Example: Select line type 9 and draw a figure using the
new line type.
5 +» п ЭВ
& + p a 0,0 200,0 200,100 0,100 0,02
0,100 200,100
0,0 200,0
Example: Select the area pattern as the line type.
& *mS1,204,
51,204,51,204,
51,204D
(Defines area pattern shown
in figure 10-4b)
& #+m3B (Selects the area pattern)
< *ра2, 3, 7, 32
< *ра9, 3,9, 122
% *pa2,10,7,52
(Drawn the vectors shown in
figure 10-4a)
Drawing vectors (2,3)-(7,3), (9,3)-(9,12), and (2,10)-(7,5)
using the area pattern shown in figure 10-4b would result
in the drawing shown in figure 10-4a.
Graphics Control Functions
Note: Only horizontal and vertical vectors can be defined
with an area pattern. All diagonal vectors are
drawn as a solid line.
Adjacent horizontal or vertical lines using the user de-
fined line type (type = 2) can be used to create patterns
more complicated than those available in an 8x8 area
pattern. User defined line and area patterns are described
in the following paragraphs.
DEFINE LINE PATTERN. The dot pattérn used to draw
vectors can be defined programmatically. Once a pattern is
defined, you must select the user defined line type (type =
2) using the Select Line Type command (xt + т 2 B). Figure
10-5 gives examples of line patterns.
Define Line
Pattern:
where: <pattern> is the decimal value 0 to 255) defin-
ing an 8-bit binary pattern. For
example,
. = 10101010 = 170.
is a scale factor (1 to 16) to be
applied to the pattern. For
example, with a scale factor of 3
the pattern defined above would
be as follows: ...
<scale>
(9,12)
—
N
to |
PES
10 | (2,10) ВО
5 (7,5) —
3 > А
2 (2,3) (7,3)
A 10,3)
TA)
0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AREA PATTERN
5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
COLUMNS
(B)
Figure 10-4. Using Area Patterns as Line Types
10-7
Graphics Control Functions
11019110 = 214 scale = 1
|| № № | № | № № | № | № М | № |
scale =
111010 = 250 scale = 1
|||} № № 111) № № 111! Ш |
scale = 2
11111111] № BE AT
10101019 = 170 scale = 3
SE E ES SS BE Hu 8
Figure 10-5. Examples of User Defined Line Patterns
Line patterns too complex to be obtained from an 8x8 area
pattern can be generated by plotting a series of lines and
varying the patterns used for successive lines. Complex
patterns such as those used in weaving can be generated
easily using this technique.
Example: Define a pattern to generate the following
vector:
E ERERAERNEOOTEOQEETEEEECETEDONÍOO
pattern = 11111010 = 250
scale = 2
E *m 250 2€
DEFINE AREA PATTERN. An 8x8 pattern can be
defined for use in filling rectangular areas. The pattern
can also be used to provide line patterns for horizontal or
vertical lines when the area pattern is selected as a line
type (type = 3). (Refer to Define Line Type.) Irregular
shapes can also be built up-by selecting the area shading
pattern and then using successive lines.
The area pattern is defined using 8 parameters, one for
each of the rows in the pattern. Each parameter is a
decimal number (0 to 255) representing an 8-bit binary
pattern. Refer to Define Line Pattern for additional infor-
mation. The display is divided up into 8x8 cells. Every
point on the display is mapped to a corresponding bit in
the pattern. Drawing horizontal or vertical lines causes
the corresponding row or column of the pattern to be used
as the line pattern. Diagonal vectors will always be drawn
using a solid line. Figure 10-6 contains sample area fill
patterns.
Row 7 11111110 = 254
Row 6 10000010 = 130
Row 5 10111010 = 186
Row 4 10101010 = 170
Row 3 10100010 = 162
Row 2 10111110 = 190
Row 1 10000000 = 128
Row O 11111111 = 255
1 = doton
0 = dot off
& #m 255,128,190,162,170,186,130,254 D
Row O Row 7
QR UE
METIO TITO
0,0
Г ОЛД ГЕ
RTE EE
HEI [CI ERT РИ CEN ETE NENE
CITC CI ICRI IRIE IRR НИ FEE ETE |
EI EHR BI TRIER |
ER EN NECE
CIC IR [CIC IR TE TR ER IRE TRA TRI FRITRY
CET ENEE NENE NENE
CIENTE NONE CHE ENTES EIN
FEET CHO TENE
[AH ai
CA CR EC FR ES TR E TEE
ECHTE ER IR TE TR CE NENE NE СТАН ЕТ
IUCN SCENE CNS NET
SHEEHAN HALE HE 121]
pl fee [EN [RI ERI TET I IE TES TCHR HB CTE
TENA
& *+*m 0,0 128,128 E
BINARY VALUE
128 64 32 16 8 4 1
row 6
= HER = ws
ен не -:
row 7
BH | Ш бо
_ НН ee?
| row 1
НН
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
COLUMNS
128,128
ENEE
10-8
Define Area Pattern:
Graphics Control Functions
A simple checkerboard pattern would be defined as
follows:
Eam 170 85 170 85 170 85 170 85 D
|
Row 0
<row 0> is the 8-bit pattern for row 0 Row 7
Select the area pattern as the line type:
стом 7> is the 8-bit pattern for row 7 & «m3 B
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Row 7 24 60
Row 6 E | 36 т 66
Row 5 N Bn 66 129
Row 4 129 || | 129
Row 3 129 || 129
Row 2 E B 66 129
Row 1 B B 36 || 66
Row 0 24 60
(a) (b)
Row 7 85 HE Ш 204
Воу 6 170 E“ HB 204
Row 5 85 HE 51
Row 4 170 | 51
Row 3 85 “a B 204
Row 2 170 E 204
Row 1 85 BE 51
Row O 170 E E 51
(c) (d)
Row 7 НН | 240
Row 6 HER 240
Row 5 HER 240
Row 4 HEE 240
Row 3 —+ 15
Row 2 15
Row 1 HE 15
RO | EEE
(e) (f)
Figure 10-6. Area Pattern Examples
10-9
Graphics Control Functions
Area Fill
A rectangular area can be filled with a pattern by simply
sending the lower left (LL) and upper right (UR) coordi-
nates of the rectangle. The coordinates can be in either
absolute or relocatable format. The pattern used is
selected by the Line Type command. This allows a choice
of predefined and user defined line patterns as well as an
8x8 bit area pattern (refer to Define Area Pattern).
An easy way to selectively erase a portion of the graphics
display would be to set the drawing mode to clear, select
the solid vector line type (type = 1), and then use the area
fill command to select the area to be cleared. Area fill is
also useful for shading bar graphs or engineering draw-
ings. The soft keys can be loaded with the proper escape
sequences and then triggered to generate area patterns
locally using either the current cursor or pen position as a
coordinate.
When an area fill is used, the currently selected line type is
used for the fill. (Refer to “Drawing Patterns” discussed
previously.)
AREA FILL, ABSOLUTE. The absolute area fill com-
mand uses the absolute coordinates of the area.
Area Fill,
Absolute:
<XLL,YLL> and <XUR, YUR> are the absolute
coordinates of the lower left and upper right
corners of the area to be filled.
where:
Example: Draw a box and then complement the entire
graphics display. Note that repeating the t * m sequence
would restore the original display.
T*p a 150 150 200 150 200 200 150 200 150 150 Е
f )
= À
“*m3a1b00511 389E
=]
a
is
==
=
10-10
Example: Clear the display area with lower left (LL)
coordinates 0,0 and upper right (UR) coordinates 100,100.
& #+m 1 a 1 b 0,0 100,100 E
“— cam—
clear mode la line Zarea to be cleared
If a predefined or user defined line pattern is selected, the
area fill command can be used to provide area shading or
complex patterns. If the user defined area pattern 1s
selected, the area will be filled with the 8x8 area pattern
(refer to Define Area Pattern). (To select line type, refer to
“Line Type” on page 10-6.)
Example: Using the area fill pattern shown in figure
10-6a, shade the area with XLL,YLL = 50,50 and
XUR,YUR = 100,100.
5+#m2a3b243666129 12966 36 24 d 50 50 100 100 E
f —
AREA FILL, RELOCATABLE. The relocatable area
fill command uses area coordinates in relocatable ASCII
format.
Area Fill,
Relocatable:
<XLL,YLL> and <XUR, YUR> are the relocatable
coordinates for the lower left and upper right
corners of the area to be filled.
where:
Example: Using the area fill pattern shown in figure
10-6¢, shade a 50 X50 unit area with the lower left corner at
the current cursor position.
t*m2a3b85 170 85 170 85 170 85 170 d 1 0 0 50 50 F
, |=
Graphics Control Functions
0,2000 2000,2000
1000, 1389 1511, 1389.
1000, 1000 1511, 1000
0,0 2000,0
RELOCATABLE
ORIGIN = -1000,-1000
DISPLAY
—^
Figure 10-7. Relocatable Origin
Relocatable Origin
The relocatable origin allows you to use one set of data and
drawing commands to display a figure at several different
positions on the screen. (See the resistor example under
ASCII Relocatable Format.)
You can also display portions of a figure that is too large to
fit on the screen. You can create a “window” that can be
positioned to display any 512 by 390 unit portion of the
figure. The value of the relocatable origin is added to the
relocatable data to obtain the coordinates used to draw the
data. Figure 10-7 illustrates the effect of a Relocatable
Origin on the display.
This technique eliminates the need to check boundary
conditions or compute new data in order to display the
desired portion of the figure. Simply set the relocatable
origin to the proper value to display the desired portion of
the figure and then send the unchanged figure data to the
terminal. The terminal will then automatically select and
adjust the “window” data.
SET RELOCATABLE ORIGIN, ABSOLUTE. The re-
locatable origin can be set to any absolute coordinates
using ASCII absolute format (—16348 to 16383).
Set Relocatable
Origin Absolute:
where: <X,Y> are the x and y coordinates in ASCII
absolute format.
Example: Set the relocatable origin to display the box in
the figure so that the box is positioned at the lower left
corner of the display.
E +m-300 -100J
( D
388,208 500,288
380,108 598,100
С *xpah300,100 500,100 500,200 300,200 300,1002
Relocatable
Origin =-380,-1090
Г Y
Ne
10-11
Graphics Control Functions
SET RELOCATABLE ORIGIN TO CURRENT PEN
POSITION. The relocatable origin can be set to the cur-
rent pen position.
Set Relocatable Origin
To Current Pen Position:
SET RELOCATABLE ORIGIN TO GRAPHICS
CURSOR POSITION. The relocatable origin can be set
to the current graphics cursor position.
Set Relocatable Origin
To Graphics Cursor Position:
Selecting The Graphics Default
Parameters
Graphics parameters can be set to their default (power on
or full reset) values. Table 10-5 lists the various parameters
and their default values. Additional information can be
found under the discussions of the individual parameters.
Set Graphics
Default Parameters: E ELA
The current graphics mode and settings can be obtained
with graphics status requests. Graphics status requests
are described in Section VII, Status. It may be desirable
to reselect graphics settings before you send graphics
data to the terminal.
Table 10-5. Graphics Parameter Default Values
PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE
Pen Condition up
Line Type 1 (solid)
Drawing Mode set
Relocatable Origin 0,0
Text Size 1
Text Direction 1
Text Origin 1 (left, bottom justified)
Text Slant О (ой)
Graphics Text off
Graphics Video on
Alphanumeric Video on
Graphics Cursor off
Alphanumeric Cursor on
Compatibility Mode
Page Full Straps 0 (out)!
GIN Strap 0 (CR only)!
1See table 10-3.
10-12
PLOTTING SEQUENCES
All vector plotting sequences are initiated by E + p. Table
10-6 lists the commands that can be used within a plotting
sequence.
Table 10-6. Graphics Plotting Control Functions
5 * p <parameters and data>
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
lift the pen
lower the pen
use graphics cursor position as new point
draw a single dot at the current pen position
set relocatable origin = current pen position
use ASCII absolute format
use ASCII incremental format
use ASCII relocatable format
use binary absolute format
use binary short incremental format
use binary incremental format
use binary relocatable format
NOP/synch
М о — ЖЖ ое. — TO + 0 00 UMP
After “ + p has been sent, the drawing format is normally
specified before data 1s sent.
If no formatis specified, ASCII absolute is assumed. There
is no explicit draw vector command. When enough param-
eter bytes to specify a single end point have been received
(the number depends on the format used), the pen is
moved from its current position to the new end point. (See
figure 10-8.) If the pen is down, a vector will be drawn. If
the pen is up, the pen is moved to the new point (without
drawing a vector) and lowered. The new end point becomes
the current pen position.
Note that if a parameter byte is lost or garbled in trans-
mission, all following end points will be improperly read.
To minimize data errors caused by the loss of a data byte,
any command can be used to reset the parameter count
and restore synchronization. Nops (z), redundant format,
or pen down commands can also be inserted to insure
synchronization if necessary.
7
, NEW END POINT
(X,Y)
* CURRENT PEN
POSITION (INITIALLY 0,0)
ua J
Figure 10-8. Current Pen Position and New End Point
Graphics sequences can extend indefinitely. In general,
longer sequences are preferred as they minimize the over-
AEN TAN AEN VARIA
be sent for each series of vectors. As the sequence length
decreases, the percentage of preamble characters in-
creases, and the vector drawing rate goes down. The worst
possible case would be to send ® * р <format> for each
vector; approximately 50% of the characters sent would be
overhead, reducing vector speed by a factor of 2.
The general format for an absolute plotting sequence is:
& + pi a <byte1> <byte2> <byte3> <byte4>Cz)
<byte1> <byte2> <byte3> <byte4> ...
...<bytel> <byte2> <byte3> <byted4>Z (or any
upper case command)
wer»
Each block of 4 bytes specifies a single point. The “1
indicates that absolute format is to be used. The “a” raises
the pen before it is moved to the point specified by the next
four bytes and lowered. A NOP (z) can be added to insure
synchronization, if necessary. The lowered pen draws a
vector as it moves to the next point, and so on. The upper
case “Z” terminates the plotting sequence.
The vector end point formats allow the pen to be moved
completely off the screen (an absolute coordinate of 1000,
for example). The actual range of the pen position can be
from —16384 to 16383. Vectors that extend beyond the
screen are clipped so that they will not wrap around.
Pen Control
The terminal uses the concept of a “pen” in drawing vector
data. The pen can be lifted or lowered as well as be
positioned using absolute or relative coordinates. For
example, the pen is lifted, moved to a starting coordinate,
lowered and moved to an endpoint to draw a line. The pen
is initially in the up state and positioned at absolute coor-
dinates 0,0 following power up or a full reset. If the pen is
raised and coordinates given, the pen is moved to the
coordinates and then lowered. The pen is normally left in
the down position.
Raise Pen: К * ра.
Lower Pen: k+pb
Vectors
Graphic data rs made up of vectors. Each vector 1s
specified by the current graphic starting point and an end
point. The current graphic starting point is one of the
following:
0,0 Initial starting point
Last point defined by the graphics cursor (f+ p c).
Graphics Control Functions
Last point defined by data in a draw or move command
(Eapíf/g/h/i/j/k/1).
Graphic points are specified in one of following formats:
e ASCII Absolute
e ASCII Incremental
e ASCII Relocatable
® Binary Absolute
® Binary Incremental
e Binary Short Incremental
e Binary Relocatable
If no format is specified in the graphic command, ASCII
absolute format is assumed. More than one point can be
givenin a command. This minimizes communications over-
head. Tables 10-7, 10-8 and 10-9 provide a reference for
computing data bytes used in the various vector formats.
ASCII Formats
In the ASCII formats, coordinates are specified with
ASCII characters 0 through 9. This means that numeric
characters generated by a simple print statement can be
used to specify X,Y pairs. The first value is used as the X
coordinate, and the second as the Y coordinate.
Spaces or commas must be used to delimit the X and Y
values. Excess delimiters are ignored. Digits following a
decimal point are ignored (i.e. 123.456 is read as 123).
Exponential notation cannot be used. Consequently, the
values must be in integer form. The number of bytes
necessary to specify a single end point depends on the
magnitude of the values.
ASCII ABSOLUTE FORMAT. The values used in the
ASCII absolute format can range between —16384 and
16383. Note that only points where X is the range 0 to 511
and Y is the range 0 to 389 will be visible on the screen. The
following example draws vectors around the perimeter of
the screen:
5 » pa 0,0 511,0 511,389,0,389,0,02
0,389 511,389
0,0 511,0
Since no format is indicated, ASCII absolute is assumed.
The “a” raises the pen, which is moved to (0,0) and lowered.
Vectors are then drawn to (511,0), (511,389), (0,389), and
back to (0,0). (Note that the values are delimited by spaces
10-13
Graphics Control Functions
or commas. The upper case Z [a nop] terminates the se-
quence. Imbedded carriage return and line feed characters
are ignored.)
ASCII INCREMENTAL FORMAT. In the ASCII in-
cremental format you can specify a delta X and a delta Y.
These values are added to the current pen position to
obtain a new end point. The first value is read as delta X
and the second as delta Y. For example to draw a square
100 units on a side, the following sequence could be used:
с * р д 100 0 0 100 -100 00 -100 2
— 100,0
0,—-100 0,100
| 100,0
Beginning at the current pen position, a series of vectors is
drawn by moving the pen 100 units to the right, up 100
units, left 100 units, and finally down 100 units. The same
figure could have been drawn at any screen location by
first positioning the pen to the desired starting point be-
fore sending the drawing sequence.
ASCII RELOCATABLE FORMAT. The ASCII re-
locatable format allows you to use a relocatable origin to
be added to the incoming X and Y coordinate values. The
resultant values are then treated as absolute coordinates
by the terminal. The relocatable format allows you to use
absolute data as if it were incremental by merely chang-
ing the relocatable origin. For example, symbol elements
specified in absolute coordinates can be drawn in different
locations as shown in the following example.
Example: Draw a resistor symbol stored in absolute
coordinates at screen locations 50,100 and 200,100.
Resistor Data = 0,10
10,10
15,15 9,20 60,0
25.5 ) |
35,15
45,5
580,10 9,8 68,8
60,10
E #258 ,100J
E+pah@,18 10,10 15,15 25,5 35,15
45,5 50,10 60,102
E+a208,108)
© +рал@ ‚10 18,10 15,15 25,5 35,15
45,5 58,10 60,102
AN
, IN
Z 0,100 Z 206.106
Binary Format
In binary format all points are sent in a packed binary
format. The coordinate values are sent using the bit pat-
terns of the ASCII characters listed in table 10-7. The
number of characters required to specify a coordinate
depends on the format used. The values for X and Y coor-
dinates can be from — 16384 to 16383.
BINARY ABSOLUTE FORMAT. Binary absolute data
is plotted with respect to an origin at 0,0. Four bytes are
required to specify a single end point. A 10 bit coordinate
in the range 0-1023, is sent for both x and y.
The bytes are ordered as follows:
BIT 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BYTE 1 0 1 X9 X8 X7 Xb X5 HI X
BYTE 2 0 1 X4 X3 X2 X1 O LOW X
BYTE 3 0 1 Y9 Y8 Y7 Y6 YS HI Y
BYTE 4 0 1 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 YO LON Y
Although it is possible to send coordinates in the range 0
to 1023, only points in the range 0-511 for X, and 0-389
for Y are visible on the screen. Vectors going off the
screen are clipped. If the data requires scaling, this must
be done before the data is sent to the terminal.
The following example shows how the 4 data bytes
are computed. The numbers are converted to the 10 bit
binary equivalent. Bits 7 and 6 are set to 01 to indicate
a parameter.
X = 0 = 00000 00000 Y = 0 00000 00000
HI X LOW X HI Y LOW Y
BYTE 1 = 01 00000 = SPACE HI X
BYTE 2 = 01 00000 = SPACE LOW X
BYTE 3 = 01 00000 = SPACE HI Y
BYTE 4 = 01 00000 = SPACE LON Y
X = 360 = 01011 01000 Y = 180 = 00101 10100
HI X LOW X HI Y LOW Y
BYTE 1 = 01 01011 = + HI X
BYTE 2 = 01 01000 = € LOW X
BYTE 3 = 01 00101 = X HI Y
BYTE 4 = 01 10100 = 4 LOW Y
An escape sequence to draw a vector from 0,0 to 360,180 is
as follows:
© + piaSP SP SP SP + ( Y 4 2
\X=0/ \Y=0/ \X=360/ \Y=180/
E + p selects a plotting sequence. The “i” specifies absolute
format. The “a” raises the pen up. The first 4 bytes (all
spaces) move the raised pen to 0,0, where it is lowered. The
next 4 bytes specify the point 360,180. After the 4th byte is
received, the pen is moved to that point, drawing a vector.
The upper case “Z” terminates the escape sequence. Note
that if spaces are used in the data sequence they are inter-
preted as data and could result in an improper plot.
BINARY SHORT INCREMENTAL FORMAT. The
short incremental format uses two bytes to specify a delta
X and a delta Y in the range —16 to +15. The five least
significant bits are interpreted as a signed, two's comple-
ment number. This number is added to the current pen
position to obtain the new end point. The data bytes are
ordered as follows:
BIT 7 6
BYTE 1 0
BYTE 2 0 1 <
5 4 3 2 1
DELTA X >
DELTA Y >
h
Tarrr pu
llowi 1g
The fo e
use of the short
a le area das ALA 14e #1 1
ne I Xampi€ illustrates tne computation and
1
ncremental format:
DELTA X = -12 = 10100 DELTA Y = 6 = 00110
BYTE1 = 01 10100 = 4 DELTA X
BYTE2 = 01 00110 = 4 DELTA Y
The following sequence moves the pen to 360,180 in abso-
lute format, then draws a vector to X = 360—12 = 348,
y = 180+6 = 186.
absolute
=",
Tepia+ (Xd) 4s <byte1><byte2>...Z
sou in EEE”
Short Incremental Short Incremental vectors
BINARY INCREMENTAL FORMAT. Incremental is
similar to short incremental, but with a larger range.
Using six bytes, delta X and Y can range from —16384 to
+16383.
BIT 76 5 4 3 2 1
BYTE1 0 1 DX14 DX13 DX12 DX11 DX10 HI DELTA X
BYTE2 0 1 DX9 DX8 DX7 DX6 DXS MIDDELTA X
BYTE3 0 1 DX4 DX3 DX2 DX1 DX0 LOWDELTA X
BYTE4 0 1 DY14 DY13 DY12 DY11 DY10 HI DELTA Y
BYTES 0 1 DY9 DY8 DY7 DY6 DYS MIDDELTA Y
BYTE6 0 1 DY4 DY3 DY2 DY1 DYO LON DELTA Y
The following example shows how incremental data bytes
are generated.
DELTA X = -400 = 11111 10011 10000
HI DX MID DX LO DX
DELTA Y * 100 = 00000 00011 00100
HI DY MID DY LO DY
BYTE 1 = 01 11111
= ? HI DELTA X
BYTE 2 = 01 10011 = 3 MID DELTA X
BYTE 3 = 01 10000 = 0 LO DELTA X
BYTE 4 = 01 00000 = space HI DELTAY
BYTE S = 01 00011 = # MID DELTA Y
BYTE 6 = 01 00100 = $ LO DELTA Y
Graphics Control Functions
Table 10-7. Characters Used in Packed Data Formats
ASCII ASCII
Character Bit Pattern Character Bit Pattern
SP 01 0 0000 0 01 1 0000
! 01 0 0001 1 01 1 0001
” 01 0 0010 2 01 1 0010
# 01 0 0011 3 01 1 0011
$ 01 0 0100 4 01 1 0100
% 01 0 0101 5 01 1 0101
& 01 0 0110 6 01 1 0110
01 0 0111 7 01 1 0111
01 0 1000 8 01 1 1000
01 0 1001 9 01 1 1001
* 01 0 1010 : 01 1 1010
+ 01 0 1011 01 1 1011
, 01 0 1100 < 01 1 1100
- 01 O 1101 = 01 1 1101
01 01110 > 01 1 1110
/ 01 O 1111 ? 01 1 1111
BINARY RELOCATABLE FORMAT. Binary relocat-
able format specifies absolute X and Y coordinates in the
range —16384 to +16383 using 6 bytes. The value
specified in the relocatable origin command is taken to be
the 0,0 point. The actual screen address is computed by the
terminal by adding the relocatable origin to the X,Y pair.
BIT 76 5 4 3 2 1
BYTE 1 0 1 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 HI X
BYTE 2 0 1 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 MID X
BYTE 3 0 1 X4 X3 X2 X1 хо LOW X
BYTE 4 0 1 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 HI Y
BYTES 0 1 Y9 Y8 Y7 Y6 Y5 MID Y
BYTE 6 0 1 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y! YO LON Y
The following example shows how relocatable data bytes
are computed.
RELOC X = -600 = 11111 01101 01000
HI X MID X LON X
RELOC Y = 200 = 00000 00110 01000
HI Y MID Y LOW Y
BYTE 1 = 01 11111 = 2 HI X
BYTE 2 = 01 01101 = - MID X
BYTE 3 = 01 01000 = € LOW X
BYTE 4 = 01 00000 = space HI Y
BYTE 01 00110 = 4 MID
BYTE 6 = 01 01000 = € LOW
Un
я
<
<
GRAPHICS FUNCTIONS IN
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS MODE
mms mm
The key (MI at the MODES level) can be used to
display the graphics escape sequences or the action of
graphics control keys. The control sequences are entered
into the alphanumeric display each time a command is
executed. Table 10-10 lists the graphics control sequences
that are generated when DISPLAY FUNCTIONS is on.
10-15
Graphics Control Functions
‘Table 10-8. Absolute Format Addressing Bytes
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 B 6 7 8 89
Ï 1 f T 1 Ï
0 8% E! 5" 8+ 8$ 81 EL E” E В) 350 pa> +7 + +! +" +8 +$ +% +4 +'
10 8: + E, a- 8. #/ 50 ®1 32 #83 360 P+C +) +* ++ +, +- + */ +0 +1
2 84 85 #6 #7 86 89 8: 5; EC E 370 [+82 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +: +;
30 18› 7 ig 11 1 15 $ 1% 4 UU 380 J+<¢ += +> +7 E 1 "NA
40 $IC 1) le Ls 15 E, 1/7 IQ 11 390 E,8 17 10 19 NT, ,/
50 412 13 14 15 16 17 1g 19 1; 1, 400 4,0 ‚1 ,2 ,3 ,4 ,5 ‚6 ,7 ,8 ,93
60 te t= 11 19 "Eo o un ng ng "Y 410 E,: 5, E» 7? M NUE —€
70 "a ". s w( "y "wy "ny, ”". ". x. "ny 420 - $ - - & - + - ( -) - + - + -, --
30 "0 "4 "wo "3 "4 “С "e 107 "eg "g 430 -, -/ - 0 - 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 -6 -7
90 1": We MC Ma HM) 9 #8 yl " 1” 440 1-8 -9 -: -3 = x= => -? 5 ,!
100 828 #% #3 #' #( #) #2 $: £, $ 450 E. .2 .¢ 2% 284 O. +
110 $2, #/ #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 460 §., .- ‚и 0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .S
120 [#8 #9 4: #: #< #= #5): £7 SU $! 470 1.6 .7 .8 .9 .: 530,6 1.2 > .?
130 49" $# $$ $% $4 $’ $( $) $+ $+ 480 1/8 /1 /" 18 /$% /% /& 7 7€ /)
140 $, $- $. $/ $0 $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 430 [/* /+ ‚ /- 14 10 /1 7/2 /3
150 #86 $7 $3 $9 $: $; $< $= $> $7 500 1/4 /5 /6 /7 7/78 /9 / /3 1€ /=
160 p%8 1! X" %# A$ %% X6 Y XC %) 510 §/> /? 0% 0! 0" 0# 0$ OX 0% OF
170 [%* %+ %, %- %. %/ %0 %1 %2 %3 520 10‹ 0) 0* 0+ 0, 0- 0 0/ 00 01
180 8%4 %5 %6 %7 28 %9 %: %: Y i= 530 102 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0: 0;
190 112 27 88% 4! 83" 8% 4% 4% 4& + 540 I<E 0: 06> 0? 18 11 1" 18 18 1%
200 J&C 85) &* &+ 4, &- $4. 4/ 40 81 550 818 15 10 1) 1a 1+ 1, 1- 1.17
210 142 83 44 215 46 47 48 89 8: 4%; 560 810 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 19
22 8< 4x 42 49 NM "1 PM ay "$ ry 570 11: 1; 41€ 1= 1> 1? 28 21 2" Dg
230 8/8 717 Cf) a 14 14 1-10 17 580 12$ 2% 2% 27 2 2 2% 2+ 2, 2-
240 §’0 ‘1 "3 73 "4 "5 "6 *7 ‘8 ‘9 590 {2 2/ 2 21 22 2 24 25 26 27
TUN 16 f= > 10 (BOY CU Ga 600 128 29 2: 2; 2¢ 2= 2> 27 38 3
260 10$ (% (E CC CC O (= (+ (, (- 610 13" 3¢ 3% 3% 348 3’ 3C 3) 3+ 3+
270 16€. 7 CO (1 (2 C3 C4 CS (6 (7 620 83, 3- 3. 3/ 30 31 32 33 34 35
280 108 (9 €: € (‹ (= O (7? )E ) 630 136 37 38 39 3: 3; 3€ 3= 3> 3?
290 192" )# $ )% Da 237 IC )) )= Je 640 848 41 4" 4# 4$ 4% 4% 4° 4C 4)
300 $), D- >». I)/ 390 DM )2 533 )4 55 650 14* 4+ 4, 4- 4. 4/ 40 41 42 43
310 [126 )7 I8 29 )»: 3); IC )* >> I? 660 144 45 46 47 49 49 4: 4; 4€ ds
320 P:B +! a" 27 2%$ 41 ef «+ *( +) 670 f4> 47 58 51 5" Ge 5$ 5% 54 5’
330 [+* ++ 2 #- 2, Фу #0 #1 #2 #3 680 155 5) 5*+ 5+ 5, 5- 5. 5/7 50 51
340 [1+4 +5 +6 #7 +3 +9 2: #; # += 690 152 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5: 5;
700 I5< 5* 25> 5? 68 6! E" Es 6% 6%
Note: & indicates a "space" character; every 710 1684 6° 6( 6) 6+ 6+ 6, E- E. El
coordinate address must consist of the
two characters shown in the table.
Table 10-9. Incremental (Short) Vector Bytes
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8 '" # $ + + , -
-16 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1U
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 < = > ?
10-
16
Table 10-10. Graphics Control Sequences Used in
Record Operations
Key Sequence Description
E E E E one Graphics cursor controls
ЕО попе Graphics cursor fast
[ GRAPH 7 E + di off
| CURSOR _ Ea dk on
Г GRAPH В E + dC on
| DSPLY | & + dD off
” GRAPH 7]
dA
CLEAR ыы
F ALPHA 7 f+ df oft
| DSPLY | T+ dE | on
Figure 10-9 shows the sequences generated when drawing
a simple box. The graphics cursor is initially on and po-
sitioned at 0,0.
GRAPHICS HARDCOPY OPERATIONS
There are two methods of obtaining a hardcopy of the
contents of graphics memory. One method uses the func-
tion keys and graphics keys on the keyboard. The other
method uses escape sequences which may be coded into a
program running on a host computer. The hardcopy may be
output from the optional integral printer or from an exter-
nal printer connected to the external printer port at the
rear of the terminal.
O € +pa213,2127
@ = *ра213 ‚213,382 ,2137
© < *раз82 ‚213,382 ,1992
@ < *ра382,109 ,213,1092
© < *ра213,109,213,2132
213,213 382,213
00 ©
O ©
213,189 382,189
+0,8
Figure 10-9. Displaying Graphics Sequences
Graphics Control Functions
When the optional integral printer is selected as the output
device, a dot-by-dot transfer of the graphics memory is
mada nn tharmal nanor Tha imacaoa 1a 14 5 nm hy 11 am
LLICAVAN, VILL VILA AAACAA Pepper. Lai iris LD LOL, vill WY Li WALL
(5.75 by 4.25 inches) centered on the paper. The transfer
takes annroximatelv 60 seconds
AUD Gppr UALLLQLTLY UV SULULIS.
The external printers that may be used for graphics
hardcopy are the HP 2671G and HP 2673A.
Initiating a Transfer from the Keyboard
Tha GRAPH OfNDYVT kov nn the cranhics/numeric nad in.
The! PH COPY! key on the graphics/numeric pad in-
itiates the graphics transfer. The keypad must be in graph-
ics mode for the GRAPH COPY function to be performed.
I toggles the function of the keypad between graphics
mode and numeric mode.
The destination(s) may be selected by pressing E, ME
(devicecontrol), ME (to devices). You may then select
(TO EXT DEV) and/or [KZ (TO INT PRT). TO EXT DEV
selects the external printer port, and TO INT PRT selects the
optional integral printer.
Using the % 4 p Escape Sequences
Coding a program to transfer graphics data either to the
integral printer or to the external printer, or both, requires
selecting the graphics memory as the source and either or
both printers as the destination.
graphics memory as the source: 75
integral printer as the destination: ed
external printer as the destination: 4d
Example: Define graphics memory as source and integral
printer as destination.
& & p 7s 6D
Example: Define graphics memory as source and both
printers as destination.
& & p 75 4d 6D
After the source and destination are defined, the transfer if
initated by either:
5 &pF (copy file from source to destination)
or
5 ap M (copy all from source to destination)
Note that an escape sequence is terminated with an upper-
case character. Also, you may combine the source and des-
tination assignments and the transfer initiation in one
escape sequence:
xt 4 p 75 4d F
10-17
Graphics Control Functions
GRAPHICS TEXT
Text strings can be written directly into the graphics image
memory. An internal character generator converts the
ASCII codes into a dot matrix representation which is
drawn as vectors. The character set includes upper and
lower case (95 characters) and the national characters
shown in Appendix B. The national character sets are se-
lected by the Terminal Configuration menu discussed in
Section II. The characters will be drawn as a 5 by 7 matrix
in a 7 by 10 cell, with descenders for lower case. This
character set is in addition to the normal alphanumeric
character set. While this character set may seem redun-
dant, it offers the following advantages:
e Characters can be drawn at any dot position, rather than
the 24 by 80 alphanumeric character positions.
e Characters can be rotated in multiples of 90 degrees.
e Characters can be scaled in size, from 1 to 8 times.
e Characters can be slanted 45 degrees for an italics-like
effect.
e Lines of characters can be right, left, or center justified.
Figure 10-10 shows the graphics character set.
Keyboard Control of Graphics Text
Graphics text can be entered directly from the keyboard.
The backspace, carriage return, and line feed functions
work as expected (even on inverted text), making it easy to
add or edit titles and labels. A summary of escape sequen-
ces and keyboard operations affecting Graphics Text Mode
is given in table 10-11.
Table 10-11. Graphics Text Functions
Key Description
5 +dS Selects the graphics image memory as the
destination for all text. Characters entering from
the keyboard or datacomm, are drawn as vec-
tors in the graphics memory using the current
text size and angle (see below). The graphics
cursor indicates the position of the next
character. Moving the graphics cursor will
cause the next text line to begin at the new
cursor position. The carriage return, line feed
and backspace functions work normally.
5 adT Terminates Text Mode.
E sm Increases the character size from 1 to 8X. The
<size>M smallest character is a 5 by 7 matrix in a 7 by 10
cell. Increasing the size makes the dots bigger
while the character is still drawn as a 5 by 7
matrix.
Tam Sets the character orientation (multiples of 90
<orienta- rees).
tion>N degrees)
E m0
— Turns slant on or off.
с * пР
ED Spaces one graphics text character to the right.
‘ (The actual direction of movement will depend
on the text orientation.)
a (Vertical Tab). Spaces one graphics text line
up. (The actual direction of movement will de-
pend on the text orientation.)
In addition, the following keys function in the same manner as
for alphanumeric text characters:
EN E, B08 68.
abcde fghi jklmnopgrstuvuxyz
ABCIEFGHIJELMHNOPORETUV ST 2
ÉdléédulâäéouacouAidÆäiczäil
I "EYL (1 %+,-,.-8123456789
Fon Al a яч . Noa
$ crn om
= BONO 2155
Е 5 ZUEIR
NOTE: All of the national characters,
(Roman Ext. set), are
accessible by entering “YES” in
the ASCII 8-Bit config field of
the Terminal Configuration
menu; then “shifting out” to the
national character set by typing
, MP. You may “shift in”
back to the Roman base set by
typing E E
NATIONAL
CHARACTERS
Figure 10-10. Graphics Text Characters
10-18
Program Control of Graphics Text
All of the parameters for graphics text can be set
programmatically. Commands are of the form: am
<parameter> <command>. The command can be alone or
part of another + m sequence.
SIZE. The ASCII characters 1 through 8 specify the
character size for graphics text. À “1” indicates the smal-
lest character, a 5 by 7 dot matrix character in a 7 by 10
cell. Increasing the size increases the size of the dots. If a
text size of 1 is specified, each dot in the cell is one dot on the
screen. À size of 2 uses 4 screen dots for each character dot
(2 X 2), and so on (see figure 10-11). À size of “1” is the
default. |
Set Graphics
Text Size:
TEXT DIRECTION. This command uses the ASCII
characters 1 through 4 to specify the text orientation (see
figure 10-12). This also changes the direction of line feed,
carriage return, and backspace.
— Normal (upright, the default)
— Rotated 90 degrees counter clockwise
Rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise (inverted)
— Rotated 270 degrees counter clockwise
о со вю —
|
Set Graphics
Text Orientation:
Graphics Control Functions
TEXT SIZE NORMAL SLANTED
Ru 7 AP
LIL?
CP PT
Figure 10-11. Graphics Text Sizes
SLANT. The graphics text characters can be slanted 45
degrees for an italics effect.
Turn On Graphics
Text Slant:
Turn Off Graphics
Text Slant:
& +m3nP
pe
La
paoy20d4-1JeIMaHT |
E+md4nP E am2nP
1004-1188 MeH
Hewlett-Packar
| aHewlett-Packard
|
E sminP
«тп О)
% + т Зп 0
A
LEFT 7
«7797
ad
>
LC
› ET +m2n0
-
ir
=
”
1
PY
CAF FLA
E +min0
Figure 10-12. Graphics Text Direction
10-19
Graphics Control Functions
JUSTIFICATION/ORIGIN. Text strings can be au-
tomatically right or left justified, or centered about a
specified point. An ASCII character 1 through 9 indicates
the origin (justification and base line) for characters with
respect to the current pen position. This function is useful
when drawing labels. (Refer to the Label command.)
Set Graphics
Text Justification:
If text is left justified, the current pen position is the left
margin. Center causes the label to be centered on the pen
position. Right justify selects the pen position as the right
margin. Bottom, middle, and top select the base line for
the line of text.
LEFT CENTER
3p 6
RIGHT
q TOP
2 5 O mona
1 —d4— 7 sor
The numbers 1-9 represent
the cursor position with
respect to the character
cell used for graphics
text characters.
For example, if text was to be right justified and set with a
base line on top of the normal character position, the num-
ber “9” would be used. Figure 10-13 illustrates the various
text positions.
When centering or right justification is used, the text
strings are buffered (stored) until all of the characters in
the string have been received. The string end is detected
by a CRor LF. The string is not displayed until the CR or
LF is received. This may be confusing when entering text
from the keyboard. The maximum length of a string when
center or right justifying is 73 characters (not including
the CR(LF)). In all cases, data written beyond the edge of
10-20
the screen is lost. There is no automatic RETURN when the
screen boundary is reached.
TURNING GRAPHICS TEXT ON AND OFF Graphics
text mode can be turned on or off from a program. These two
commands use the “ + d sequence but are discussed here
under graphics text for completeness.
On. This command will cause Graphics Text Mode to be
turned on. All displayable characters will be stored in the
graphics memory. The drawing mode is initially set to
jam mode to permit overstrike replacement of characters.
A different mode, such as set or complement, can be
selected at any time.
Text is drawn using the current text assignments for size
and orientation. Graphics text mode accepts CR, LF, BS,
HT, and VT as control characters. The , ES ED. and
UD keys can be used to position the graphics cursor in
character increments.
Turn On Graphics
Text Mode:
Turn Off Graphics
Text Mode:
If the graphics cursor is moved, the graphics text margin is
moved to the new cursor or pen position.
Characters are drawn using the current drawing mode
(set, clear, or jam). If set mode is used, entering a charac-
ter, backspacing, and entering a second character causes
an overstrike. If jam mode is used, the new character will
replace the old character.
If a lower case “s” is used, additional escape parameters
can be appended to the sequence. Otherwise the next
characters will be routed to the graphics memory.
Examples:
E + ds k 100,100 o B— set graphics memory
| L— position cursor at 100,100
turn on cursor
£ «dsS This is a text string®
Off. This sequence turns off graphics text mode and re-
stores normal alphanumeric operation.
Turn Off Graphics
Text Mode:
GRAPHICS TEXT STATUS. You can check the current
text settings with a graphics text status request. Refer to
Section VII, Status, for additional information.
Graphics Control Functions
Left-Justified
Hewlett-Packard
19400 Homestead Road
Cupertino, California 95014
Center-Justified
Hewlett-Packard
19400 Homestead Road
Cupertino, California 95014
Right-Justified
Hewlett-Packard
19400 Homestead Road
Cupertino, California 95014
Left-Justify
Center-Justifv
Right-Justify
Figure 10-13. Graphics Text Justification
LABEL. This sequence is used to send a single record of
graphics text to the terminal. The characters are stored in
the graphics memory using the current text size, angle,
slant, and justification. The label is drawn beginning at
the current pen position.
Graphics
Text Label:
The record must end with a CR, LF, or both. A CR moves
the pen to its original position when the label command
was first received. An LF moves the pen down one line
(character spacing). Note that the actual directions moved
following a CR or LF depend on the text orientation
selected.
The maximum record length is 73 characters, not including
the & «1 preamble or the CR(LF).
Example: &+1This is a sample label %‘
Compatibility Mode allows the terminal to plot data in-
tended for a terminal using a display with 1024 by 1024
addressable points. This mode makes it possible to use
graphics programs developed for use with other graphics
terminals with a minimum of reprogramming.
The terminal operates in two submodes while in Compati-
bility Mode. In Alphanumeric mode the terminal simply
displays alphanumeric data on the screen as in normal
operation. In Graphics mode the terminal responds to al-
phanumeric data as vector coordinates. Normally the ter-
minal will be switched between these modes to display
messages, plot graphics figures, and then display addi-
tional messages. These modes are controlled with several
control sequences. (These sequences are ignored or acted on
differently if the terminal is not set for Compatibility
Mode.) Table 10-12 lists the terminal’s responses to Com-
patibility Mode control sequences.
If delays are required, the baud rate can be lowered or fill
characters added to prevent data loss when operating the
terminal at high speeds. Refer to Section VI, Data Com-
munications.
Vectors are drawn using the current line type and line
drawing mode. This gives you the capability of drawing
dotted and dashed lines, etc. by changing the program to
send the additional escape sequences. In general, all of the
normal features of the terminal (display enhancements,
tape control, etc.) are available only in the Alphanumeric
mode,
Compatibility Mode is turned on by selecting either scaled
or unscaled operation. Escape sequences controlling Com-
patibility Mode begin with %#t. This preamble is then
followed with one or more commands. These commands are
listed in table 10-13. As in all other escape sequences, a
captial letter ends the sequence. Figure 10-14 contains
examples of typical escape sequences.
10-21
Graphics Control Functions
Table 10-12. Compatibility Mode Control Sequences
CONTROL
SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION RESPONSE
5 & Read status and alpha cursor position <status byte><HI X><LO X>
<HI Y><LO Y><terminator>
1 0 1 1/0010101 1
Depends on parity— |
Auxiliary Device (inactive)
Hard Copy Unit
1 = not ready Margin
0 = ready 0 = margin 1
1 = margin 2
Mode
1 0 = Graphics Mode
0 1 = Alpha Mode
The terminal will return one of the following characters as the status byte:
Printer ready co] pr» printer or printer not ready
+ ; — Margin 2, Graphics Mode
) 9 — Margin 1, Graphics Mode
% 7 — Margin 2, Aipha Mode
’ 5 — Margin 1, Alpha Mode
& % Read graphics cursor position <HI X><LO X><HI Y><LO Y><terminator>
(20 ms delay)
Er 5
T Y Read graphics cursor position when key struck <KEY><HI X><L0 X><HI Y><LO Y><terminator>
a 5 Make hardcopy
BF End graphics mode. clear screen, and home cursor
% Go into graphics mode (draw vectors)
% Go into alpha mode
% Backspace (H'). Moves 1 space left (14 units)
Hr Horizontal Tab (1). Moves 1 space right (14 units)
% End graphics mode
Le Line Feed (J'). Moves 1 line down (22 units)
Y Vertical Tab (K"). Moves 1 line up (22 units)
NOTES
The terminal will normally respond with an 4 character when an % character is received. Compatibility Mode disables the terminal's
%/A& handshake. Compatibility Mode causes most control codes to be ignored.
The Read Status, alpha cursor position, and graphic cursor position cause block transfers to the computer system. If the computer system
does not use the DC1/DC2/DC1 handshake, 1nhHndShk (6) and InhDc2CH) in the Terminal Configuration menu must be “ves” for these
transfers to occur. (Refer to “Terminal Configuration menu” in Section Il.)
10-22
Compatibility Mode Configuration
Compatibility Mode operation is controlled by Com-
pat (P,Q) field in the Terminal Configuration menu. This
field can also be set programmatically using the “ct & 5...
.” sequence shown in table 10-13. The P and @ straps de-
termine the terminal’s mode of operation after being in-
itialized (power up or full reset). The straps are inter-
preted as follows:
STRAPS DESCRIPTION
P Q
О 0 Normal graphics operation
0 1 Unscaled Compatibility Mode
1 0 Scaled Compatibility Mode
Normal graphics operation
In addition, when in Compatibility Mode, you can select
the following optional capabilities:
GRAPHIC INPUT TERMINATOR. You can select the
terminator sent by the terminal following the input of
Graphics Control Functions
cursor address information. The terminator can be a CR,
CR and EOT, or no terminator.
PAGE FULL BUSY. When this strap is in, the keyboard
will be locked after the 35th line of text is received from the
computer. The terminal can be cleared by pressing the
[GRAPH CLEAR] key. This strap is ignored in Unscaled
Mode.
PAGE FULL BREAK. When this strap is in, the terminal
will send a 200ms break signal to the computer after the
35th line of text is displayed. The terminal may also be set
to BUSY (see Page Full Busy). When out, the strap will
+ A+ + QE TT £4 + ix hh
cause the cursor to home and the next 35 lines of text to be
set with a left margin at x = 259. This strap is ignored in
Unscaled Mode.
The commands to control these strap options are listed in
table 10-13. Refer to the manual for the replaced graphics
terminal for additional information on the operation of
these straps and how they should be set.
Graphic Data
There are differences in display size (512 x 390 for the HP
2623A versus 1024 x 781 for other terminals) and line
length (24 lines of 80 characters for the HP 2623 A versus 35
lines of 74 characters for other terminals). See figure 10-15.
Table 10-13. Commands for Selecting Compatibility Mode
COMMAND
CODE
TURN SCALED COMPATIBILITY MODE ON (P open)
TURN UNSCALED COMPATIBILITY MODE ON (Q open)
TURN COMPATIBILITY MODE OFF (P,Q closed)
*"&s1po0a
с & 5 Ор 1 @
5 &4&450p0Q
The following commands simulate straps used on other graphics terminals:
SET GRAPHICS INPUT TERMINATOR STRAP
0 — Carriage return only (Normal position)
1 — Carriage return and EOT
2 — No carriage return, no EOT
SET PAGE FULL BREAK STRAP
0 — Out (Normal position)
+ — In
SET PAGE FULL BUSY STRAP
0 — Out (Normal position)
1 — п
МОР
£ + t <bytel> a
E& a ti <byte1> b
CE + 1 <bytet> c
10-23
Graphics Control Functions
& &= 1 p0@Q
A.) Turn on Compatibility Mode
Turn on unscaled
Compatibility Mode
\ 7/ /
tx*50po0a
С.) Turn off Compatibility Mode
Turn on scaled Compatibility Mode
No terminator
t&:=: 0p1Q@ %+*t2a1c1B
Select page full busy
B.) Turn on Compatibility Mode and select straps
Turn off Compatibility Mode
Send Break after page full
ON
Figure 10-14. Turning on Compatibility Mode
(0,780) (1023,780)
+ 74 CHARACTERS — — >:
35
(0,0) (1023,0)
799,744 POINTS
2590 CHARACTERS
A.) TEKTRONIX 4010
(0,389) (511,389)
1
.-4+—— 80 CHARACTERS — ——:
(0,0) 24 (511,0)
199,680 POINTS
2847 CHARACTERS
B.) HP 2623A
Figure 10-15. Comparison of a Terminal with 1024 x 780 Display and the HP 2623A
Graphic data can be drawn either scaled or unscaled. Scal-
ing divides X coordinates by 2, and Y coordinates by 128/59.
This maps the 1024 x 780 display into 512 by 390. This
allows a program written for the 1024 x 780 terminal to
run unchanged, and still display the entire picture (with
some loss in resolution). The image doesn’t cover the entire
screen (only going to X = 512). The remainder can be used
as a dialog area for alphanumeric text (see figure 10-16).
Unscaled mode shows a 512 by 390 subset of the 1024 x 780
picture. The area this covers can be changed by modifying
the value of the relocatable origin (and redrawing the
picture). The relocatable origin is subtracted from all in-
coming coordinates in unscaled mode. If this is set to 0,0
(the default) the range X = 0 to 511, Y = 0 to 389 will be
displayed (see figure 10-17a).
10-24
Setting the origin to 0,360 would cover the X = 0 to 511, Y
= 360 to 749. To display an area larger than 512 x 390, you
must change the scaling statements in the program. The
advantage of unscaled mode over scaled mode is that un-
scaled allows you to use the entire available display area.
Graphics Data Format
In Compatibility mode the graphics data is formatted as
two-byte coordinate values. The lower five bits of each
byte are used to make a 10 bit (0-1023) coordinate. Data
sent to the terminal must have the “Y” coordinate sent
first; <Upper Y> <Lower Y> <Upper X> <Lower X>.
Graphics Control Functions
la ————— 73CHARACTERS ————|
779 389 |
1024 x 780 IMAGE AREA Scaled Mode
1024 x 780 Image Area
39
389 lines {Text Size and Slant
are disabled in Scaled Mode -
HP 2623A |
0 о?
0 511 1023 0 511
Display Comparison HP 2623A Display in Scaled Mode
Figure 10-16. Scaled Data
779 T 780
HP 2623A 1
512 x 390 Subset
Relocatable Origin: 1024 x 780 IMAGE AREA
390 ESC * m 0,390J '
390 CO
| HP 2623A
| 512 x 390 Subset
| Relocatable Origin:
| ESC *m 0,04 |
0 0
0 511 1023 0 511 1024
779 1 779
HP 2623A
512 x 390 Subset
Relocatable Origin:
ESC * m 512,390J
390 290 —
| HP 2623A
| 512 x 390 Subset
| Relocatable Origin:
| ESC *m 512,0J
0 0 1.
0 513 1023 0 512 1023
Changing the Relocatable Origin (ESC * m <x,y>J) on 2623's Display to Cover the Entire
780 x 1024 Display in Unscaled Mode
Figure 10-17. Unscaled Data
When data is returned to the computer (cursor position, — — Bits
etc.), the X coordinate 1s returned first; <Upper X> 7 6
<Lower X> <Upper Y> <Lower Y>. Upper X or Y byte
0 1
1 0 Lower X byte
1 1 Lower Y byte
Data bytes sent to the terminal use bits 6 and 7 to indicate
the byte is an Upper byte, a lower Y, or a lower X. Bit 8
(parity) 1s not used.
10-25
Graphics Control Functions
These identifying bits allow you to send only the changed
portion of a four byte address. The following data bytes
must always be sent:
e Lower X byte
e Any changed byte
e Lower Y byte if the Upper X byte has changed
Table 10-14 can be used to determine address bytes. For
example, to plot the points A (0,0), B (0,31), C (256,31), D
(256,0) the following sequence would be used:
Text
Text can be placed in either the alphanumeric memory or
in the graphics memory. If the terminal is set for alpha-
numeric text, the text will be sent to the alphanumeric
memory. This is generally the most useful, as text can be
scrolled, edited, erased, etc. without affecting the graphics
image. If you select graphics text (% * ds), text will go into
the graphics memory. Text to be written to the graphics
memory can be scaled or rotated. (Refer to Graphics Text in
this section for additional information.)
When text is written to the graphics memory, the graphics
cursor is moved to indicate where the next character will
be stored. (The alphanumeric cursor is only used when
data is stored in the alphanumeric memory.) This differs
from terminals that have only one mode for text and dis-
play the graphics cursor only when waiting for graphic
input from the user.
SCALED MODE GRAPHICS TEXT. In Scaled Mode,
text is initially written into the graphics memory, the size
is fixed to allow for 35 lines of text. The text angle is set at
0 degrees and unslanted. The text origin is set to the left
and bottom. These settings allow the “Page Full” feature
to work properly and existing software to run without
changes. If you do not require the Page Full feature, you
can not change the text settings. You can redirect the
text to the alphanumeric memory.
UNSCALED MODE GRAPHICS TEXT. In Unscaled
Mode, the text size is unchanged and graphics text mode
is not initially turned on. Text is stored in the alpha
numeric memory unless the graphics text mode is speci-
fically enabled.
Y=0 X=0 Y=31 X=256 Y=0 X=0
A C D A
NORMAL ADDRESSING: & SP *«5SPEesSPEAESPAQSPA CE HP " CE SP*SP® &
SHORT ADDRESSING: & SP * SP @ 9 e ® ce ' e “ sPeO %
NOTE: “SP” means
“space” character.
Turn on Return to
graphics mode alphanumeric mode
B C
0,31 k — 256,31
0,0 ‘= Y 56.0
A D
10-26
Graphics Control Functions
Table 10-14. Coding of Compatibility Mode Graphics Data
UU noia as Low Order Y Low Order X
TT DEC. | ASCI | DEC. | ASCH
0 32 64 96 | 128 160 192 224 | 256 288 320 352 | 384 416 48 48 96 64 a
1 33 65 97 | 129 i6i 1939 25 | 257 289 321 9353 | 385 417 449 481 7 a 5 a
2 34 66 98 | 130 162 194 26 | 258 290 322 354 | 386 418 40 48 | 98 b 66 B
3 25 87 99 | 131 163 195 227 | 259 291 323 355 | 387 419 451 483 | 99 с 67 С
SP | " # $ % & ( ) * + - . {| «= ASCII
High Order X & Y
Low Order Y Low Order X
X or Y Coordinate
DEC. ASCH DEC. ASCU
512 544 576 608 640 672 704 736 768 800 832 864 896 928 960 992 96 ` 64 a
513 545 577 609 641 673 705 737 769 801 833 865 897 929 961 993 97 a 65 ^
514 546 578 610 642 674 706 738 770 802 834 866 898 930 962 954 98 b 66 B
739 с С
538 570 602 634 666 698 730 762 794 826 858 890 922 954 986 1018 122
539 571 603 635 667 699 731 763 | 795 827 859 891 923 955 987 1019 | 123
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 83 Je DEC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | < = > ? | me ASCII
High Order X & Y
Example: 340Y,70X is found as follows:
340Y = 42 (upper Y) 116 (Lower Y) 70X = 34 (Upper X) 70 (Lower X)
340Y,70X > «1 "EF
10-27/10-28
Escape Codes
APPENDIX
Escape Codes
A-2
Escape Codes
A-3
Escape Codes
Escape Codes
Escape Codes
Escape Codes
Escape Codes
Escape Codes
Escape Codes
A-10
Keyboards and Character Sets
APPENDIX
NATIONAL KEYBOARDS
Figures B-1 through B-7 show the various national
keyboards which are available as options 001 through 006.
Note that these ontions also include the extended charac-
== AL LY Aaa AAN AAA lla alla e ALITAL LA
ter set ROMs which support all of the national languages,
and the line drawing set.
If you order the standard USASCII keyboard and you wish
the terminal to include the extended character set ROMs,
then you must specifically order the ROMs as option 202.
The French keyboard (option 003), when delivered, is
physically arranged in the AZERTY layout; a keycap ex-
traction tool comes with it. '10 change the keyboard to the
QWERTY layout, you must physically rearrange the À, Z,
Q, and W keys as shown in figure B-4.
7-BIT VS. 8-BIT OPERATION
You configure the terminal for 7-bit operation by setting
the ASCII 8 Bits field of the Terminal Configuration menu
to “NO”.
When the terminal is configured for 7-bit operation, the
ASCII «S0> code (which enables the active alternate
character set) applies through the end of the current line;
when the cursor moves to the next lower line you must
once again issue a <SO> if you wish to continue typing in
the active alternate character set.
You configure the terminal for 8-bit operation by setting
the ASCII 8Bits field of the applicable Terminal Configu-
ration menu to “YES”.
When the terminal is configured for 8-bit operation, the
ASCII <s0> code applies until the next subsequent <SI>
code (which disables the active alternate character set),
even if the <S1> occurs several lines below the <SO> code.
ISO/ASCII CHARACTER SET
Table B-1 shows the standard ISO/ASCII character set.
If the terminal includes the extended character set ROMs
and is configured for 7-bit operation, the shaded characters
in table B-1 are replaced on the screen with the following
characters (depending upon which national language is
specified in the Terminal Configuration menu):
KEYBOARD
LANGUAGE OPTION # 35 64
USASCII (standard) # e
Swedish/Finnish 001 # É
Danish/Norwegian 002 # e
French 003 Ё а
Сегтап 004 f §
United Kingdom 005 f e
Spanish 006 # e
DECIMAL VALUE
91
. A >: ra
"a D:
92 93 94 96 123 124 125 126
\ ] ^ \ { : } ~
0 A 0 ё а 6 a ü
0 A ^ ` e © a ~
с $ ^ ` é u e
0 ü ^ y a Ó Ц В
\ ] ^ ` { : } ~
N ú ` { ñ > ~
If the terminal is configured for a foreign language but
does NOT include the extended character set ROMs, the
characters in the above table are displayed on the screen
as spaces.
If the terminal is configured for 8-bit operation and a
foreign language, the active alternate character is set to
“Roman Ext”.
B-1
Keyboards and Character Sets
Figure B-1. Swedish/Finnish Keyboard (Option 001)
Figure B-2. Danish/Norwegian Keyboard (Option 002)
Figure B-3. French Keyboard (Option 003), AZERTY Layout
7
No
Keyboards and Character Sets
Figure B-4. French Keyboard (Option 003), QWERTY Layout
Figure B-5. German Keyboard (Option 004)
Figure B-6. United Kingdom Keyboard (Option 005)
B-3
Keyboards and Character Sets
Figure B-7. Spanish Keyboard (Option 006)
EXTENDED ROMAN SET
If the terminal is configured for 8-bit operation and
“Roman Ext” is selected as the active alternate character
set, the entire character set comprising tables B-1 and B-2
is used when interpreting character codes. In such a case,
the eighth data bit determines which table applies. If bit 8
is a zero, the character code is interpreted according to
table B-1. If bit 8 is a one, the character code is interpreted
according to table B-2.
Note that if the terminal does NOT include the extended
character set ROMs, the character codes are still inter-
preted as described above but those codes which map to
table B-2 are displayed on the screen as spaces.
As with any of the alternate character sets, you enable the
Extended Roman set with a <SO> control code (control-N)
and disable it with a <SI> control code (control-O).
The extended character set is used by the HP 300 and HP
250 computer systems and the HP 2631 and HP 2608
printers.
LINE DRAWING SET
If your terminal contains the line drawing character set
option, you can construct forms and tables by combining
B-4
different types of line segments. Each individual type of
line segment is associated with one of the alphanumeric or
symbol keys as shown in figure B-8. Figure B-9 contains
the keystrokes used for generating a sample data entry
form.
Note that you use the “shift out” (50) and “shift in” (SI)
control codes to shift from the standard ASCII character set
to the line drawing set and back again. For example:
1. To shift from ASCII to the line drawing set, use SO by
pressing the N key while holding the key down.
2. To shift from the line drawing set back to ASCII, use SI
by pressing the O key while holding the key down.
See Appendix C further for information on using the line
drawing set.
ASCII/EBCDIC CHARACTER CODES
Table B-3 summarizes the entire 128-code ASCII character
set, table B-4 presents the decimal, octal, and hexadecimal
codes for the ASCII character set, and table B-5 presents
the decimal, octal and hexadecimal codes for the EBCDIC
character set.
POr. PINTOR
Table B-1. Standard ISO/ASCII Character Codes
CONTROL (CNTL)
DISPLAYABLE
CHARACTERS CHARACTERS
7 0
BIT 6 0
4321 ° О
@ /0
0000
NUL
A 1
0001
SCH
B 2
0010
STX
C3
0011
ETX DC3
D 74 по
0100 15 4 O T a |
FEOT WY Oca N
EY NEa| U/2 Nk
0101 % ETE Ute u
ENG NAK
FABNE| V 2205,
0110 &l6 | Fv] fv
ACK SYN
G 7 I Ww 23 Ey
0111 ?|c|w|g|w
BEL ETB
н Ив В | X 778NEN
1000 (181 H| x! h|[ x
6 CAN
| Иа НЫ У ов? м
1001 ) y i Y ! y
HT EM
SON i 2/26 NH
1010 * ЭГ) |2
LF 50:8
К ИУ) ИМЕ,
1011 +
м ESC
LANG IN /28N0 s
1100 <
FF ES
M/13N | 1/29N'5
1101 =
Co "o
N 14 5 A 30 "a
1 11 >
> Hs
0 15 _ 31 5
1111 A _
si 5
— ACKNOWLEDGE
— BELL
— BACKSPACE
— CANCEL LINE
— CARRIAGE RETURN
— DATA LINK ESCAPE
— DEVICE CONTROL 1
— DEVICE CONTROL 2
— DEVICE CONTROL 3
— DEVICE CONTROL 4
— DELETE
— END OF MEDIUM
— ENQUIRY
— END OF TRANSMISSIÓN
ERE MD
-
"
SA
SP
— ESCAPE
— END OF BLOCK
— END OF TEXT
-— FORM FEED
— FILE SEPARATOR
Keyboards and Character Sets
Table B-2. Extended Roman Character Codes
Ba = 1
EXTENDED ROMAN CHARACTERS
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
BIT 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
4321 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0000 — a A
0001 é i
A
0010 О Й
0011 o ú ft
0100 a A
0101 С e i
0110 N О ©
rs ,
0111 n u e
a * ..
1090 7 | a A
1001 `
D-
1010
г | | ©.
©,
©: | =
1011 .. Ц U
1100 ~ 3 É
+101 8 e 1
KAG О В
1131
rm
с:
— GROUP SEPARATOR
— HORIZONTAL TAB
— LINE FEED
— NEGATIVE
ACKNOWLEDGE
— RECORD SEPARATOR
— SHIFT IN
— SHIFT QUT
— SPACE
% — START OF HEADING
% — START OF TEXT
$ — SUBSTITUTE
Y — SYNCHRONOUS IDLE
4 — UNIT SEPARATOR
Y — VERTICAL TAB
Contro! Character Legend
key pressed — dispiayed
while CNTL OS С character
15 held down 3 N
LETX
standard — —— >— decimal
abbreviation equivalent
Keyboards and Character Sets
Figure B-8. Line Drawing Set Elements
STOCK NO, В & D DATES MFG.
SPECS.
DRAWING PART NAME DRAWING TITLE REMARKS
XXX NUMBER A{B{C|D
Figure B-9. Sample Data Entry Form
Keyboards and Character Sets
Table B-3. ASCII Character Set
DECIMAL ALTERNATE |DECIMAL
VALUE ¡GRAPHIC COMMENTS CHARACTER | VALUE ¡GRAPHIC COMMENTS
0 Ш Null @° 64 (a Commercial at
1 Start of heading A 65 A Uppercase A
2 + Start of text Br 66 B Uppercase B
3 x End of text Ce 67 C Uppercase C
4 T End of transmission D“ 68 D Uppercase D
5 N Enquiry Er 69 E Uppercase E
6 x Acknowledge Fe 70 F Uppercase F
7 Q Bell Ge 71 G Uppercase G
8 % Backspace He 72 H Uppercase H
9 A Horizontal tabulation I 73 I Uppercase 1
10 т Line feed Je 74 J Uppercase J
11 я Vertical tabulation K“ 75 K Uppercase K
12 E Form feed Le 76 L Uppercase L
13 a Carriage return M“ 77 M Uppercase M
14 Ъ Shift out N“ 78 N Uppercase N
15 A Shift in O° 79 O Uppercase O
16 1 Data link escape Pc 80 P Uppercase P
17 É Device control 1 (X-ON) q 81 Q Uppercase Q
18 % Device control 2 Re 82 R Uppercase R
19 % Device control 3 (X-OFF) Se 83 S Uppercase S
20 4 Device control 4 Т° 84 T Uppercase T
21 k Negative acknowledge U“ 85 U Uppercase U
22 Y Synchronous idle Ve 86 V Uppercase V
23 a End of transmission block We 87 W Uppercase W
24 ® Cancel Xe 88 X Uppercase X
25 M End of medium ус 89 Y Uppercase Y
26 le Substitute yA 90 Z Uppercase Z
27 © Escape В 1 91 [ Opening bracket
28 s File separator \“ 2 92 \ Reverse slant
29 5 Group separator pe 1 93 ] Closing bracket
30 " Record separator A 1 94 A Circumflex
31 + Unit separator —_° 2 95 — Underscore
32 Space (Blank) 96 ` Grave accent
133 ! Exclamation point 97 a Lowercase a
34 > Quotation mark 98 b Lowercase b
35 # Number sign 99 с Lowercase c
36 $ Dollar sign 100 d Lowercase d
37 % Percent sign 101 e Lowercase e
38 & Ampersand 102 f Lowercase f
39 Apostrophe 103 g Lowercase g
40 ( Opening parenthesis 104 h Lowercase h
41 ) Closing parenthesis 105 i Lowercase i
42 * Asterisk 106 j Lowercase j
43 + Plus 107 k Lowercase k
44 , Comma 108 ] Lowercase |
45 - Hyphen (Minus) 109 m Lowercase m
46 ; Period (Decimal) 110 n Lowercase n
47 / Slant 111 о Lowercase o
48 0 Zero 112 p Lowercase p
49 1 One 113 q Lowercase q
50 2 Two 114 r Lowercase r
51 3 Three 115 5 Lowercase s
52 4 Four 116 t Lowercase t
53 5 Five 117 u Lowercase u
54 6 Six 118 у Lowercase v
55 7 Seven 119 w Lowercase w
56 8 Eight 120 X Lowercase x
57 9 Nine 121 y Lowercase y
58 : Colon 122 2 Lowercase z
59 о Semicolon a 2123 1 . ¡Opening (left) brace
60 < Less than 2124 | Vertical line
61 = Equals 2125 } Closing (right) brace
62 > Greater than 2126 — Tilde
63 ? Question mark 127 Delete
Notes: 1. The equivalent EBCDIC character uses a different graphic.
2. No equivalent character exists in EBCDIC.
B-7
Keyboards and Character Sets
Table B-4. ASCII (7-Bit) Character Codes
GRAPHIC DEC OCT HEX GRAPHIC DEC OCT HEX
NUL 0 0 0 e 64 100 40
SOH 1 1 1 A 65 101 41
STX 2 2 2 B 66 102 42
ETX 3 3 3 С 67 103 43
В-8
Keyboards and Character Sets
Table B-5. EBCDIC Character Codes
GRAPHIC DEC OCT HEX GRAPHIC DEC OCT HEX
NUL 0 0 0 SP 64 100 40
SOH 1 1 1 65 101 41
STX 2 2 2 66 102 42
ETX 3 3 3
Keyboards and Character Sets
Table B-5. EBCDIC Character Codes (Continued)
GRAPHIC DEC OCT HEX
128 200 80
a 129 201 81
b 130 202 82
c 131 203 83
J
GRAPHIC DEC OCT HEX
{ 192 300 CoO
A 193 301 C1
B 194 302 ce
С 195 303 C3
249 371 F9
APPENDIX
Programming Examples
This appendix presents several utility programs, written Once FORMIO! is stored as a BASIC program file within
in BASIC, that you may find useful when implementing an the host computer, you use it as follows:
applications program to drive an HP2622A Display Termi-
nal or an HP 2623A Graphics Terminal. 1. Switch the terminal to local mode, home the cursor, and
clear the display.
2. Using the line drawing set, design the data entry form.
FORMIO! When vou are done, leave the cursor nositioned at the
start of a line anywhere BELOW the form.
This program reads the content of display memory into the
host computer and generates the sequence of PRINT
statements necessary to recreate the data.
. Switch the terminal back to remote mode and, within
the BASIC Interpreter, run FORMIOL1.
4. FORMIO1 will ask you what starting line number and
Figure C-1 shows a source listing of FORMIO1. increment you wish used. For example, if you want the
>list
FORMIO1
10 FILES x,*
15 SYSTEM X1," PURGE FDRTA"
20 SYSTEM X1, "BUILD FDATA,rec=-132,,f,ascii"
30 SYSTEM X1, "FILE X=$stdin,rec=-256"
40 ASSIGN "FDATR",1,A1
SO RSSIGN "X",2,A1, HR
60 DIM AS[255],RAISIE],CS [3]
70 PRINT CTL(208), 27"F""27"a";
90 ENTER 255,X,A$%
90 CONVERT A$[8;3] TO K
95 SYSTEM X1,727";"
100 PRINT "This program creates basic statements that define the”
110 PRINT "FORM or other data in this terminal”s memory." ;LIN(3)
120 INPUT "Starting statement number, increment 77" ,R,B
130 SYSTEM T9,727+";" '
150 PRINT “27"h";
160 PRINT #1;"scr" ;END
170 FOR I=1 ТО К
180 PRINT “27"d";
180 LINPUT #2; А$
200 IF UPS$CR$[1,31)=" RUN" THEN 500
210 IF UPS$SCA$S [1,4))=" >RUN“ THEN 500
220 CONVERT R TO R18
230 REM compensate for imbedded " marks
240 C=-4
250 IF C+5>LENCAS) THEN 310
260 C1=POSCAS [C+5],” 34)
270 IF NOT C1 THEN 310
280 C=C1+C+4
290 AS=A$[(1,C])+" "34" +"34+A$ [C+1]
300 GOTO 250
310 REM spaces >=7 are converted to direct cursor addresses
320 FOR C=1 TO LENCAS)
330 IF ASIC,C+6]=" "THEN DO
340 FOR C1=C+7 TO LENCAS)
350 IF A$[C1,C11<>»" " OR LENCASIxC1 THEN DO
360 CONVERT C1-C TO C$
370 R$ [Cle"27"&a+"+DEB$(C$)+"C"+RS$ [C1]
380 GOTO 310
390 DOEND
400 NEXT Ct
410 DOEND
420 NEXT C
430 REM output form record as a BASIC print statement
440 PRINT #1;" "+A1$+" print ctl1(208),8";END
450 PRINT #1; 34+RA${1,LEN(AS$) MIN 1271;" &" END
460 IF LEN(A$)<128 THEN PRINT #1;734;END
470 IF LENCHS)>=126 THEN PRINT #1;RA$[1281+734;END
480 A-A+B
430 NEXT I
500 PRINT “27"FNow type ”XEQ FDATH” then "LIST." LINC)
510 PRINT "These statements will reproduce your terminal”s memory--"
520 PRINT "modify, NAME, RENUM, and SRVE as you wish...... "
530 SYSTEM TS, 27+" :"
550 END
Figure C-1. FORMIO1 Source Listing
Programming Examples
PRINT statements numbered starting with 10 and pro-
ceeding in increments of 10, type “10, 10” and then
press ED.
. FORMIO1 homes the cursor and reads each line un-
til the cursor reaches the line containing the RUN
command.
6. Enter “XEQ FDATA” and then press GD. FORMIO! is
now replaced in the BASIC Interpreter work space by
the PRINT statements which, when executed, will
recreate the data that was read from display memory.
Gn
At- this point you may do with the PRINT statements as
you like (LIST them, RUN them, NAME and SAVE them,
add more statements to them, and so forth).
LRGLINE
This program accepts characters entered through the
keyboard and replaces them on the screen with large
characters created by the line drawing set.
Figure C-2 shows a source listing of LRGLINE.
Once LRGLINE is stored as a BASIC program file within
the host computer, you use it as follows:
1. Within the BASIC Interpreter, run LRGLINE.
2. Move the cursor with the space bar, then type the
desired string of characters and then press ED. Start-
ing at the cursor position, LRGLINE recreates the
string using the line drawing set and then leaves the
cursor positioned at the left margin in the third line
below the large character string.
3. Repeat step #2 for as many character strings as desired.
4. To stop the program, enter a control-Y and then type
“ABORT”.
With the terminal in local mode, use the edit keys (insert
character, delete character, insert line, and delete line) to
reposition the characters as desired and then, in remote
mode, use the FORMIO1 program to generate the PRINT
statements necessary to recreate the large character
string(s).
LRGLINE
10 PRINT LIN(4)
20 LINPUT L1$
30 IF LEN(L1$)=0 THEN GOTO 150
40 L1$=UPSS$(L1$)
50 J$-DEB$(CL1$)
60 IF LEN(J$)=0 THEN GOTO 150
70 1»1
ВО IF LISII,IJ<O" "
90 I=I+1
100 GOTO 80
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
S000
3010
L1$-DEB$CL1$)
GOSUB 3000
PRINT CTL (208), 279";
GOTO 20
“Bd@®xxx" 727" &dBz\" "27" &dBz\"
THEN GOTO 110
PRINT CTL(208),727"8a~-1r";I-
IF G#LEN(L1$)>78-1 THEN L1$=L18${1,INT((?8-1)/86)]
PRINT CTL(Z208),”7 107 107107107 10710710727" £a0C"' y
REM SUBROUTINE TO PRINT STRING IN L1¢ IN LINE DRAWING SET
REM USES VARIABLES L1$ THRU L4s,L1 THRU L3
3020 DIM L1$(B80]1,L2¢[11),L.38(128,75),L481(1]
9025 INTEGER L4
8030 IF UND(L1)=1 THEN DO
S040 L3$[32] =" N \ \ \ A
3050 LIS [33]I=" CON C N EN NX NM
3060 L3$ [34]=" CEN \ \ N \"
9070 LIS [351=" с с NZEZCZN с с Nzezezh C € \"
9100 L3$[39)=" с “ "727'£dB7" 7727" £d0 Nov x x x"
9160 L3$[44] =" N N Ne NN "S27" 8dBz" 727" &dR NX"
9180 L3s [46] =" N N \ e N"
3200 LIS [AB] ="x" 727" LaBzzz" 27" EdOxxc CNE CNE cN\" 727" 8dBz""27&
1 C4727" 4,
9210 L3$[49]=" "727" LaADz" 727" £dec Хх с “N E Хх с о xxexx\"
972720 LIS [SO] ==" "27" LaBzzz" 7 27" Edéec che" 727" &dBzzzz \C Nex xno!
9230 L3$[51)«"c" "27°" EdBzzz" 727" Ed@ex cx "27" £dBzzz" "278
" Ed@c< cxexxxex"
9240 . LIS[S2I="c ENE ec" 727" 8dBzzz2z" 727" &d®c\ CN en"
9250 3$ 153) "с" "27" Ка Вх 222 “с N27"EdBZzzz72" "27" Edex cNCxxxg™"
9260 LIS [54] ="c" "27" 2dB2zz" 27" 2Lad8cxec Nc" 727" &dBzzz" "278
"&аФх “с chNexxxe\"
9270 LIS [SS] "cc" 727" EdB77272" 727" EdecNn ex ex CN EN"
9280 L38[56) «"x" "27" &dBzzz" "27" Ed@x\c eNz" ° 27" EdBzzz" 7278
"“ Ed@z<c eN"°27"EdBz" "27" Rd@xxx" 727" RdBz=<"
9290 L3$(57]="x"*27"RdBzzz" "27" Ed@x\c en" 727" EdBxzzz" "278
"dc ex en"
3309 LIS [58] =" \ CON \ CON \и
9310 13$ 153) =" N CON N CO N"727"EdBzx""27"2d® \"
9360 L3$[(66])="c"°27"EdPzzz" °27"Rd@x<c cN\c" 72?" 8&dBzzz" "278
"8d®z\c chexxx" 727" 8dBz\"
8370 LIs(BS]l="x""27"8dBzzz" "27" &d®x\¢ CN\CXXXC\C CNC en"
C-2
Figure C-2. LRGLINE Source Listing
Programming Examples
9380 LIS[E7]="x" "27" EdBzzz" 27" adexNc — "727" &dBx\c Ne жом тата
HRaARw!l 22TH 0 AdB ww 2200 JT 1
he e ei ATA RA el UL N
3330 LIS [ES] ="c" 727" £dB227" "27" EdOGx Nc E NC CNC cNcxxx" 727" &dBz \"
3400 L3$[69]="c""27"E&dBzzzz<c Nc" 727" 8&dBzz" "27" &d® Ne NE x x xx \"
3410 LIS (70) ="c" 2?" 8&dBzzzz Nc NEXXAX E Xe N
94720 LIS [71] "xx" 727'8£dB727" 27" 2dex“uc #727" BdBx\c ххх Сс ex" "278
"8dBz" 27" &d@x xx" "27" &dBz\"
9430 L3$[723="cC exe c\c" 27" &dBzzz" "27" &d®c\c exe EN"
9440 L3$(73)="27"8&dBzz" 727" &d®c" 727" &dBzz\ "7276
"8d@®c “© с N с Axxcxx\"
9450 L38$ [74] =" ex eN CN c\"727"8dBz" "27" &d@®x xx" "27" &dBz"
9460 LIS [?5]="c exe c"”27"8dBx\cccz “E € NE CON"
9470 L3$ [75] ="C NC NE NE NEON
9480 LIS [77] «"CEZCENC © exc "727" 8&dBz" 727" &d® cc ENE c\"
9490 L3$({(78])="c ENCE CNC C CNC CENC cn"
9500 L3$[79]="x""27"8&dBzzz" "27" &d@x\¢c CNC CNC eN" 727" BaB7" "2764
" &d@xxx" "27" EdBz=N"
9510 L3¢[20)1 =" "727" 8dB2z22
"&dBx\c Xe N
9520 L3$[(B1)=" x" 727" &dBzzz" 727" &d®x\C CNC exc "727" EdB7' "278
"8d@zc\"' 727" 8dBz" 127" &d@x xx" 27" £dBx"
8530 L3$[B2]="c" 27" &dBzzz" "27" &d®x\C chcxxx""27"&dBzNc c “E ce"
9540 L3$[83] =" x" "27" &dBzzz" "27" 2d@xXc x" 727" &dBz" 7274
" Rd@xxxz< ex" 27" RdBz" 727" Rd@xxx" "27" &dBz<"
9550 L3$(841="27"8&dBzz" "27" &d@®c" 727" &dBzz\ "7278
"8d®c “ CN CN © ON
3560 LIS [B5] ="c exc CNC E NC EN" 27" &dBz" 27" EdOxxx" 727" 2£adB2"
9570 LIS [BE] «"C exc CNC eN" 27" &dBx" 727" &d@c с" 27" &dBx\ "278
"&dBx" "27" &d@c" 727" &dBx" "27" 8&d® \"
3580 LIS [57)]=e"c CNC CNC X CNC c eXec"* 27" &dBx" "27" &d@cex<"
9590 LIS [BB] «"c ENEE N E NEECNC ce"
S600 L3$[89])e"c exc E27" 8dBz" 727" £8d®@c c"2?"8dBz“ ©
9610 L3$ [90] =" 27" &dBzzzz""27"&d@c\ CN c NC NON
9800 DOEND '
9810 PRINT CTL(208); "27" IB";
9820 FOR L1=s1 TO LENCL1$)
3830 PRINT CTL(208),727"4";
S840 L3=1
S850 L2sNUMCLISIL1I,L1))
9851 IF POS(L3$[L2,1,751]1,"\")=0 THEN L2=32
9B60 FOR I=1 TO 5
"7774 LTS
zi ATA
Far
-
Or
7
3870 L4»P0S(L3$[L2,L3,751,"\")
9875 IF L4=0 THEN RETURN
3880 PRINT CTL(208);/14+L3$[L2,L3,L3+L4-21-715+"27"&de ";
9890 L3=L4+L3
3900 PRINT CTL(208);715”13710;
9910 NEXT I
9920 PRINT CTL(208),’27"&a-5r+6C"+’27"4';
9930 NEXT L1
9940 RETURN
Figure C-2. LRGLINE Source Listing (Continued)
, APPENDIX
Datacomm Connector Pins i
This appendix lists the pins used on the datacomm connec-
tor on the HP 2622A and 2623A, along with the signal on
each pin.
RS-232-C
Pin Code Description
12 BA Transmitted Data
13 CA Request to Send
14 CD Data Terminal Ready
24 Shield
40 CH Data Signal Rate Selector (DTE)
42 BB Received Data
44 CB Clear to Send
45 CC Data Set Ready
46 CF Received Line Signal Detector
48 AB Signal Ground
Index
absolute, ASCII ........ cc iii, 10-13
absolute, binary ...... PP 10-14
addressing scheme, display memory ................ 4-4
addressing, absolute ............... oil 4-5
addressing, absolute, combining
absolute and relative ............ ...............4-6
addressing, absolute, cursor relative ................ 4-6
addressing, absolute, screen relative ................ 4-5
AIDS KEY «oii ec 15
area fill, absolute and relocatable ................ 10-10
areapattern .......... iii aa eee en» 10-8
area pattern, definition ......................... 10-8
Ascii 8-bit, config field, terminal menu ........... 2-7
ASCII absolute ........ cco. 10-13
ASCII characterset ...................... B-5, B-7, B-8
ASCII incremental 112020000400 e ae ea ane 0 6 10-14
ASCII relocatable ............ ccs. 10-14
asynchronous, definitionof ........................ 6-1
attribute field, user key ............. iL 3-5
AutoLine Feed Mode ............... LL. 3-3
B
back tab ....... La ea Aa aa ee aa aa aa ea ess 4-10
battery maintenance ................ iii. 9-1
Baudrate, config field, datacomm menu ............ 6-5
BaudRate, config field, external device menu ....... 5-10
bell code ..............eeceeccnorororeorecocecea.. 3-12
binary absolute ............._—eorecerereecereao. 10-14
binary incremental ..........._.eeeereeccorereno. 10-15
binary relocatable ................eeecxeovcereoo. 10-15
binary short incremental .................. 10-15, 10-16
blinking...........oeerresoreroreooro0rce eee. 4-11
Block Mode .............eeeeeecrorvocarecrrecerea 3-2
Block Mode, definition of .......................... 6-1
bottom logging........000200000 000 a es ee ea ea na aa e... 5-4
BREAK key ............eererverccceroraceroerece, 3-12
buffer overflows.............eeco.eeerocororecreren. 6-7
buffer, receive ...........e_erereooorerrorarrecen A 6-7
C
cables, data communications ....................... 6-2
cabling, data communications ......................6-3
cabling, external printer . ................. LL, 5-8
Caps Lock Mode eek 3-4
Caps Mode rer iii 3-4
Capslock, config field, terminal menu .............. 2-3
centering graphicstext.................... 10-20, 10-21
charactermode ............... i... 3-1
character mode, definition of ....................... 6-1
characteroverruns ................. iii... 6-7
checkerboard pattern. ............................ 10-9
ChkParity, config field, datacomm menu ........... 6-6
cleaning the screen and keyboard ................... 9-1
cleardisplay ........... кк вк квквеккек. 4-8
clearline ............ a ea ae nee ne 4-9
clear mode, graphics ee 10-6
clearing margins...........o.eeecrececerdeeedareo. 4-9
clearing tabs ..............—..e.sea0d0a0xaoreaiaome.. 4-9
commands, graphics ...........e_.eeeeeedooeaococe. 10-2
Compat (P,Q), config field, terminal menu .......... 2-7
Compatibility Mode ................ee_eeeceeesveos 10-21
Compatibility Mode configuration ................ 10-23
Compatibility Mode graphic data coding .......... 10-27
Compatibility Mode, configuration menu field ....... 2-7
complement mode, graphics ....................... 10-6
completion codes, device control .................... 5-6
compressed characters, integral printer ............. 5-2
configuration lock/unlock .......................... 2-9
configuration menu programming .................. 2-9
configuring the terminal .......................... 2-1
configuring the terminal, general description ....... 1-5
control codes, graphics ............... oo... 10-2
copy all... ee 00 5-4
copy all of display memory ......................... 5-4
copy line ..... ee 5-5
copy menu to printer ............ iin. 5-5
copy page ........c_eer.eorcorecorcacerecrorereecanen—. 5-5
CSCCBIXmi t, config field, datacomm menu .......... 6-6
CS(CBXXmit, config field, external device menu .... 5-11
cursor addressing .............. iii, 4-4
AR iii ae ee 0 4-1
CUrsor dOwn 220202020000 a aa aa ea ea sa eee sean 6 4-2
cursor left .............eeeeereevrrerrcarenecoee... 4-2
cursor positioning ............—_e_eeeoreooreorrorec. 4-4
cursor right ...... een. 4-2
Cursor sSensing .........r_—e.eeecereerrorecorer ere... 4-4
CUIrSOr UP ......e.e..eeeorecacorerrerereraaeoar reco. 4-2
data communications .........._eeeeresereooeocaroo 6-1
data communications cables .............eoeeeevoe. 6-2
data communications test connectors ............... 6-2
data communications, general description ........... 1-7
data entry forms, designing and using ............. 4-12
data format, ASCII absolute ..................... 10-13
data format, ASCII incremental .................. 10-14
data format, ASCII relocatable ................... 10-14
data format, binary ......... cc... 10-14
data format, binary absolute ..................... 10-14
data format, binary incremental ........ nanAnAnA 10-15
data format, binary relocatable .................. 10-15
data format, binary short incremental ...... 10-15, 10-16
data format, Compatibility Mode ................. 10-24
data format, default .................. квк веко о, 10-12
data format, packed (see binary) ................. 10-15
data link, definition of . ........................ .... 6-1
Index
data logging .......101020000 000 ana aa ae a aa ea ane 5-4
data transfers, computer to terminal
(binary and ASCII) ................ civ... 5-7
Datacomm Configuration menu .................... 6-5
datacommtest ................. a a ae aa aa ana anne -3
DC1/DC2, external printer........................ 5-11
default dataformat ............................. 10-13
default parameters, graphics ..................... 10-12
defining user keys locally .......................... 3-5
defining user keys programmatically ............... 3-6
delete character. .................................. 4-8
delete characters, during receive errors ............. 6-7
deleteline ............. i. 4-7
designing forms ................... aa a aan ana 4-12
destination devices, selecting ...................... 5-5
device control completion codes .................... 5-6
device control function keys ........................ 5-4
device modes function keys ........................ 5-1
diagonallines ..................... ... .. ... ...... 10-7
diagonal lines, define pattern ..................... 10-8
disable keyboard ................................. 3-11
display control, graphics .......................... 10-3
display enhancements ............................ 4-10
display enhancements and graphics data ........... 10-1
Display Functions Mode ........................... 3-4
display lock ............... ae. 3-3
display on/off, graphics ........................... 10-4
drawing forms ................. iii... 4-12
drawing modes, graphics ....... enererercerercercen. 10-4
E
EBCDIC charactercodes .......................... B-9
editoperations ................. coi... 4-6
enable keyboard .................... LLL. 3-11
enhancements, display ........................... 4-10
ENQ/ACK, data communications ................... 6-8
EngAck, config field, datacomm menu ............... 6-5
ENTER key .........o i. 3-7
ENTER key, Block Line and Format Mode .......... 3-9
ENTER key, Block Line Mode ...................... 3-8
ENTER key, Block Page and Format Mode .......... 3-9
ENTER key, Block Page Mode ..................... 3-9
ENTER key, character and Format mode ........... 3-8
ENTER key, charactermode ....................... 3-8
ENTER key, Modify Mode ........................ 3-10
error codes, datacomm self-test ..................... 8-3
еггог тебввасев.................................... 8-1
error messages, printer ............................ 8-3
errors, receive Lotti teeta eee eee, 6-7
escapecodetable .......................... ....... A-1
c Xfer (NJ), config field, terminal menu ............. 2-7
expanded characters on integral printer ............ 5-2
external printer port, general description ........... 1-7
F
fill area, absolute and relocatable ................ 10-10
FldSeparator configurationfield .................. 2-6
form,sample ................ a aa a na aan B-6
Format Mode .............. o. 20000000000 3-2, 4-15
FORMIO1 program ...........eeeeeeoroeoio rene er. C-1
FormsMode ............................... Cee 4-15
1-2
forms, designing and using ....................... 4-12
FrameRate configurationfield ..................... 2-2
framing errors .............. iii 6-7
full duplex operation .............................. 6-8
full duplex, definition of ........................... 6-1
function key hierarchy ............................ 1-6
function keys ........... a aa aa aa a aa aa aan an 1-5
function keys, configkeys.......................... 2-1
function keys, device control ....................... 5-4
function keys, devicemodes ........................ 5-1
graphicscommands .............................. 10-2
graphics commands, lengthof .................... 10-13
graphics cursor control ........................... 10-3
graphics displayon/off........................... . 10-4
graphics display set/clear ......................... 10-4
graphics display, addressing points ................ 10-1
graphicsdrawingmodes .......................... 10-6
graphics functions, keyboard ...................... 10-1
graphics input terminator ....................... 10-23
graphics keys, descriptionof ...................... 10-2
graphics keys, locationof ......................... 10-1
graphics memory control ......................... 10-4
graphics memorydump ......................... 10-17
graphics sequence termination ................... 10-13
graphics sequence types ...............c. iin... 10-2
graphics text centering .................... 10-20, 10-21
graphics text direction .......................... 10-19
graphics text justifying ................... 10-20, 10-21
graphicstextmargin ............................ 10-20
graphics texton/off ............................. 10-20
graphicstextsize ................... iii. 10-19
graphicstextslant .............................. 10-19
graphics transfers toprinter ....................... 5-6
graphics/numnericpad ............................ 3-5
half-bright ................. iL. 4-11
hardreset ............ i, 3-11
hardcopy operations ............................. 10-17
hardwired connections ............................. 6-1
heirarchy, function key ............................ 1-6
home down .............. a... 4-2
home uUp..........eee.eerrecocerearec iaa recono 4-2
horizontal lines, define pattern ................... 10-7
identify ROMs ............. ii. 8-3
incremental, ASCII ............................. 10-14
incremental, binary ............................. 10-15
InhEolWrp(C) configuration field .................. 2-4
inhHndShk CG) configuration field .................. 2-4
insert character ............o_eeeeescoreroercerara 4-7
Insert line ........... 04e a es ea ee een ea anna ee 4-6
installing a Point-to-Point configuration ............ 6-2
integral printer, general description ................ 1-6
inverse video ..........._ee0ecerererarenrec ara e 4-11
jam mode, graphics............c. iii... 10-6
justifying graphics text ................... 10-20, 10-21
K
key definition field, user key ....................... 3-6
key labels, displaying/removing .................... 3-7
key labels, removing ................. oa... .. 1-5
keyboard control ................ iia. 3-1
keyboard graphics functions ...................... 10-1
keyboard, cleaning ............... ii. 9-1
keyboard, enable/disable .......................... 3-11
keyboard, general description ...................... 1-3
keyboards, national ............._eo_e_reeeesereconos B-1
L
labels, graphics text ............._—e—_eeeeererereo. 10-21
Language, config field, terminal menu .............. 2-6
line drawing set elements .................... 4-13, B-6
Line Modify Mode ................ cia... 3-2
line pattern, defining ............................ 10-7
line type .............. 5.5.55. ee 10-6
Line/Page(D) configuration field .................. 2-4
Local Mode ...................0200000re0cicerce cen. 6-7
localmode ......... aa aa aa aa ne a ae +» 3-1
LocalEcho, config field, terminal menu ............. 2-2
LRGLINE program ............oeeecrerccocorreseee.. C-2
M
margin, graphicstext ........................... 10-20
margins, Compatibility Mode .................... 10-22
margins, settingand clearing ...................... 4-9
memory control, graphics ......................... 10-4
Memory Lock Mode ............................... 3-3
menu, copying toaprinter ......................... 5-5
menu, Datacomm Configuration ................... 6-5
menu, External Device Configuration ............. 5-10
menu, Terminal Configuration ..................... 2-1
menu, user keys definition ..................... 1-5, 3-6
messages, error ...........eceeeadeaareaarariaireo, 8-1
metric format, integral printer ..................... 5-3
modem connections ....................... 6-1, 6-3, 6-4
modem considerations ............................. 6-2
modem disconnect code ........................... 3-12
modems .......102000000 0 La aa aa a aa aa ee an ea ea ee 6-3
MODES key ......11120000 204 ae aa a aa ae aa aa ana ne 1-5
modes selecting ................ iia... 3-1
modes, Auto Line Feed ............................ 3-3
modes, Bottom Logging ............................ 5-4
modes, Caps .........c.oiiii aa aa a ea a an aa aa aa ee 3-4
modes, Caps Lock ................................. 3-4
modes, character/block ............................ 3-1
modes, Databogging ......... ooo oon 54
modes, Display Functions .......................... 3-4
modes, display lock ...................... LL. 3-3
modes, display overflow protect .................... 3-3
modes, Format ............................... 3-2, 4-15
modes, Forms ............. a aa a ea da aa 4-15
modes, graphics drawing ......................... 10-6
modes, graphics pad ............. iii... 3-5
modes, Line Modify ............................... 3-2
modes, Memory Lock .............................. 3-3
modes, Modify All ................................. 3-2
modes, numericpad ................ i... 3-5
modes, Record .............. i. 5-1
modes, Remote/Local ..................... annee 3-1
modes, Top Logging ............eeeeececoodoros0e.. 5-4
Modify All Mode ............ cin. 3-2
Modify Mode, Line ............00000000s sance en 3-2
N
national keyboards B-1
NeXt PAB. «iii ee ieee 4-3
NOP, graphics .............oeeecercoroocererece. 10-13
O
options, keyboard ...............ee.eee0ed00r0000.. 1-5
origin, relocatable .............................. 10-11
overflowprotect ............. coi... 3-3
P
pacing mechanisms ............................... 6-8
Page Full Break ................................ 10-23
PageFullBusy ....................... ......... 10-23
page, next/previous .......... ci eue 4-3
paper loading ............... ea aa a nana 9-3
paper, integral printer ............................. 9-2
paper,partnumber ................... LL. 9-2
parameters, graphics ............eeeereorocorereo. 10-3
parameters, graphics default ..................... 10-12
parity checking ................emeveroere0ee een. 6-7
Parity, config field, datacomm menu ............... 6-5
Parity, config field, external device menu ......... 5-10
pattern, area ........... ii. 10-8
pattern, checkerboard ............................ 10-9
pattern, defining line ............................ 10-7
pattern, predefined .............................. 10-6
pattern, userdefined ............................. 10-7
patterns, graphicsdrawing ....................... 10-8
pen control ............. 00000000... 10-13
plotting commands summary .................... 10-12
point plot (line type pattern) ...................... 10-6
Point-to-Point configuration, installing ............. 6-2
Point-to-Point programming information ........... 6-6
Point-to-Point, definitionof ........................ 6-1
power-ontest ........... a aa ea aa nana 8-1
predefined pattern ............................... 10-8
previous page ..........eeeeecereoaroanorarararec.. 4-3
printer device codes, how to change ................ 5-11
printer modes, selecting ........................... 5-1
printer nulls, configfield ....................... 5-11
Printer port LL SS
printerself-test ................... 0.00. 8-3
printer, copying to. ............... iin. 5-5
printer, device control completion codes ............. 5-6
printer, external, cabling .......................... 5-8
printer, external, configuration menu .......... 5-8, 5-10
printer, external, configuring ...................... 5-8
Index
printer, graphics transfers ......................... 5-6
printer, integral, general description ............... 1-6
printer, integral, self-test .......................... 5-8
printer, receiving data from computer............... 5-7
printer, selecting as destination ............ Cea 5-5
printer, skipping pages ...........eeeecoearaceadoiono 5-6
PrinterCode4, config field, external device menu .. 5-11
programmable graphics functions ................. 10-2
programming configuration ........................ 2-9
protected fields .................. ........ ........ 4-15
range, data ........... iii 6 10-15
rasterdump .......... i cee 10-17
receivebuffer ......... i 6-7
receive errors .........r_ewocereoroerovrorrocioorerene. 6-7
Record Mode ..............—.eocevereseorrecarecarem. 5-1
Record Mode, long lines in ......................... 5-3
RecvPace, config field, datacomm menu ............ 6-6
relative addressing, cursor ......................... 4-6
relative addressing, screen ......................... 4-5
relocatable binary ................ a aan e ne 10-15
relocatableorigin ................ i 10-11
relocatable, ASCII .............................. 10-14
Remote Mode ..............ecomeeenecrcrrereoocnec. 6-7
remote mode ............_e_weereorecoreoreorecornma 3-1
report format, integral printer ..................... 5-3
TeSel «i ee een 3-11
ReturnDef configuration field ..................... 2-2
rolltextdown ................ iii 4-3
roll text Up ........ ee 4-1
ROMs, identify .............. cin. 8-3
scale, linepattern .................... sea e a 0000 10-7
scaled Compatibility Mode ....................... 10-23
Scaled Compatibility Mode ........................ 2-8
screen blanking ........... iii 0 4-10
screen relative addressing .................... oo... 4-5
screen, cleaning ........ o.oo iii i 9-1
self-test, integral printer .......................... 5-8
self-tests ..... co ii ieee 8-1
self-tests, datacomm test ................ LLL. 8-3
self-tests, general description ...................... 1-7
self-tests, identify ROMs ........................... 8-3
self-tests, power-ontest .................. iL 8-1
self-tests, printertest....................... LLL. 8-3
self-tests, screen patterns ............e.eeeecocrcono 8-2
self-tests, terminal test ............_eeecoreereroroco. 8-2
send display (ed) ........ eee a ea a aan» 3-10
set mode, graphics ............... iia, 10-6
settingmargins ............. iii, 4-9
shift-incode .............. ci 4-15
shift-outcode .......... ccc, 4-15
short incremental, binary ................. 10-15, 10-16
skip lineonprinter..................... lL. 5-4
skip page on printer .........000000000 0000 a nes 00e 5-6
soft reset 1202202002 La ae aa ee 00 3-11
specifications ..........eoé_reverrrrreoreerrercecer e». 1-2
1-4
SPONCB) configuration field ................_e_eoeeeco. 2-4
SR(CH), config field, datacomm menu ............... 6-6
SRRInvert, config field, external device menu...... 5-11
SRXmit, config field, external device menu ......... 5-11
start bits ....... e eee ea ea ea ae ae a ea ae» 6-7
StartCol configuration field ...................... 2-3
status, ASCII charactersusedin.................... 7-1
status, device .......... ee 7-6
status, external printer ............................ 7-6
status, graphics ............ ie 7-7
status, graphics, any other parameter ............. 7-10
status, graphics, echo suppress mode ............... 7-7
status, graphics, read area shading capability ...... 7-10
status, graphics, read current pen position .......... 7-8
status, graphics, read device capabilities ............ 7-9
status, graphics, read device I.D. ................... 7-8
status, graphics, read display size .................. 7-9
status, graphics, read graphic modification
capabilities ................ i. 7-10
status, graphics, read graphics cursor position ....... 7-8
status, graphics, read graphics cursor position
with wait ............... ea ea ana ea a ea aa eee 7-8
status, graphics, read reset status ................. 7-10
status, graphics, read relocatable origin ........... 7-10
status, graphics, read zoom status ................. 7-10
status, integral printer ............................ 7-6
status, interpreting .................. 0 ace nee ce 7-1
status, primary ............ iii ii. 7-1
status, primary, bytes .............. LL. 7-3
status, secondary .............. iii 7-2
status, secondary, bytes ........................... 7-5
status, terminal ................. iL 7-1
status, terminal I.D. ................ .............. 7-1
status, terminator ............... iii... 7-1
stopbits ........ a Lane eee eee 6-7
strapping, Compatibility Mode ................... 10-23
synchronization, graphics ....................... 10-12
tab ........o_eeeecocoreoreccarercarerarenroerana 4-10
tabs, setting and clearing .......................... 4-9
Terminal Configurationmenu...................... 2-1
terminating graphics sequences .................. 10-13
text, Compatibility Mode ........................ 10-26
text, graphics ................... iii... 10-18
thermal printerpaper ........................ 0... 9-2
top logging .......... iii i 5-4
transmit only fields, not supported ................. 4-15
underlining ..........._.o—eeecoraeraaiaederan ear. 4-11
unlock configuration ............... .............. 2-9
unprotected fields ......................... ....... 4-15
unscaled Compatibility Mode .................... 10-23
Unscaled Compatibility Mode ...................... 2-8
user defined area pattern ......................... 10-8
user defined line pattern ......................... 10-7
user defined pattern ....................... LL. 10-7
USE KY S Lv ii ie enero 3-5
user keys definitionmenu ..................... 1-7, 3-6
USER KEYS key ..............eeesndcaroe0oo00m.. 1-5
user keys, defining programmatically ............... 3-6
user-definable keys ...............e_eworeeserosoreo. 3-5
VeCtors ..........oeoeocxenidasoococaoerorneeoaananeoo 10-13
vertical lines, define pattern ...................... 10-7
video enhancements ............ _reoceocoocearoacorao 4-10
Index
wait (one second) code .......... 3-12
window, graphics ...........eeeeercororerrereaa. 10-11
X
XmitFnetn(A) configuration field .................. 2-3
XmitPace, config field, datacomm menu ............ 6-6
XmitPace, config field, external device menu ....... 5-11
XON/XOFF, data communications ............... 6-6, 6-8
XON/XOFF, external printer ....................... 5-11
I-5
2622A/2623A REFERENCE MANUAL
Part No. 02622-90008 Printed: 7/82
Your Comments, Please . . ...
Your comments assist us in improving the usefulness of our publications. Comments are an important part of
the inputs used in preparing updates to manuals.
Please complete the questionnaire, fold it up and return it to us. Feel free to mark more than one box to a
question and to make any additional comments. If you prefer not to give us your name just leave the last part,
name and address, blank. All comments and suggestions become the property of HP.
Thank you for your help.
1. Did vou have any difficulty in understanding or applying the material presented in this manual?
[J None OJ Minimal Difficulty [J Difficulty [J Considerable Difficulty
If so:
us sr LILIA ILL fold
a. What were the “difficult” areas?
[J indexing? [] Depth of coverage? (OJ Examples?
[] Organization? [] Omitted information? (9 Other (Please explain)
b. How could we clarify these areas?
2. What errors or misleading information have you found in the manual? (Please give page numbers.)
3. What was your level of programming knowledge before you started using this manual?
[J None ( Beginner [J] Intermediate [J Expert
4. What is your major application of the terminal?
[7 Business Adminstration HJ Interfacing () Medicine
[] General Computation [] Education What kind?
( Engineering [7] Data Entry (J Other
What kind? [] Control
ee a a A LIL — — fold
5. What best describes how you use the terminal?
[ Run programs written by others [J Do applications programming [7] Hobbyist
[] Write simple programs {] Write complex programs {J Other
(] Do simple calculations
6. General Comments:
Name:
Address:
Thank you for your help. No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 506 CUPERTINO, CA, USA.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Hewlett-Packard
Roseville Terminals Division
Attn: Marketing Publications
8000 Foothills Blvd.
Roseville, California, U.S.A., 95678
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
Cr HEWLETT
02622-90008 Printed in U.S.A. 7/82 PACKARD
">